FANUC Series 30+-MODEL A/B

FANUC Series 31+-MODEL A/B

FANUC Series 32+-MODEL A/B
FANUC Series 35+-MODEL B
FANUC Power Motion +-MODEL A

Fast Ethernet
Fast Data Server
OPERATOR'S MANUAL

B-64014EN/06
 • No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.

The products in this manual contain software controlled based on Japan’s “Foreign
Exchange and Foreign Trade Law”.
For this reason, the export of these products is subject to an export license based on that
law.

In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be
regarded as ”impossible”.

This manual contains the program names or device names of other companies, some of
which are registered trademarks of respective owners. However, these names are not
followed by ® or ™ in the main body.
B-64014EN/06 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
"SAFETY PRECAUTIONS" describes the safety precautions related to the use of CNC units, to ensure safe
operation of machines fitted with FANUC CNC units. Read this section carefully before attempting to use
any function described in this manual.
Users should also read the relevant descriptions in the Operator’s Manual of the CNC to become fully
familiar with the functions to be used.

Contents

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE.........................................................................s-1

GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ............................................................................................s-2
GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT ...............................................s-3

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine.
Precautions are classified into Warnings and Cautions according to their bearing on safety. Also,
supplementary information is described as Notes. Read the Warnings, Cautions, and Notes thoroughly
before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger
of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved
procedure is not observed.

CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved
procedure is not observed.

NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and
Caution.

• Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

s-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-64014EN/06

GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

WARNING
1 Before operating the machine, thoroughly check the entered data. Operating the
machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine behaving
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the tool, machine, and/or workpiece, or
injury to the user.
2 Never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the programmed
value, compensation value, current position, and external signal settings. Also,
never attempt to machine a workpiece without first checking the operation of the
machine. Before starting a production run, ensure that the machine is operating
correctly by performing a trial run using, for example, the single block, feedrate
override, or machine lock function, or by operating the machine with neither a tool
nor workpiece mounted. Failure to confirm the correct operation of the machine
may result in the machine behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the
workpiece and/or machine itself, or injury to the user.
3 Ensure that the specified feedrate is appropriate for the intended operation.
Generally, for each machine, there is a maximum allowable feedrate. The
appropriate feedrate varies with the intended operation. Refer to the manual
provided with the machine to determine the maximum allowable feedrate. If a
machine is turn at other than the correct speed, unexpected load may be applied
to the machine, possibly causing damage to the tool, machine, and/or workpiece,
or injury to the user.
4 When using a tool compensation function, thoroughly check the direction and
amount of compensation.
Operating the machine with incorrectly specified data may result in the machine
behaving unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the tool, machine, and/or
workpiece, or injury to the user.
5 The parameters for the CNC and PMC are factory-set. Usually, there is no need to
change them. When, however, there is no alternative other than to change a
parameter, ensure that you fully understand the function of the parameter before
making any change.
A failure to set a parameter correctly may result in the machine behaving
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the tool, machine, and/or workpiece, or
injury to the user.

CAUTION
1 Immediately after switching on the power, do not touch any of the keys on the MDI
unit until the position display or alarm screen appears on the CNC unit.
Some of the keys on the MDI panel are dedicated to maintenance or other special
operations. Pressing any of these keys may place the CNC unit in other than its
normal state. Starting the machine in this state may cause it to behave
unexpectedly.
2 The operator's manual for the CNC describes all the basic functions of the CNC,
including the optional functions. The selected optional functions vary with the
machine. Some functions described in this manual may not, therefore, be
supported by your machine. Check the machine specifications before using the
optional functions.

s-2
B-64014EN/06 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION
3 Some machine operations and screen functions are implemented by the machine
tool builder. For an explanation of their usage and related notes, refer to the
manual provided by the machine tool builder.
For example:
• On some machines, executing a tool function causes the tool change unit to
operate. When executing a tool function on such a machine, stand well clear of
the tool change unit. Otherwise, there is a danger of injury to the operator.
• Many auxiliary functions trigger physical operations, such as rotation of the
spindle. Before attempting to use an auxiliary function, therefore, ensure that
you are fully aware of the operation to be triggered by that function.

NOTE
Command programs, parameters, and variables are stored in nonvolatile memory
in the CNC. Generally, the contents of memory are not lost by a power on/off
operation. However, the contents of memory may be erased by mistake, or
important data in nonvolatile memory may have to be erased upon recovering
from a failure.
To enable the restoration of data as soon as possible if such a situation arises,
always make a backup of the data in advance.

GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT

WARNING
Be careful enough for the following warnings when you develop two or more
applications or use networks.
If you neglect them, there is a danger of the user being injured or there is a danger
of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged.
1 Be careful enough if you write an identical CNC data, an identical PMC data or
a series of related data set by two or more above applications including
network functions. Because they are executed based on each individual cycles
(in other words, asynchronous cycles), there is a possibility that the data will be
written in an unexpected order.
Therefore, do NOT write above data in the following cases.
- Applications and network functions
- Two or more applications
- Two or more network functions
Data, applications and network functions of interest are listed in below.
However, all may not be listed completely because new features will be added
in the future.
2 Be careful enough that you must prevent PMC signals in the same byte from
being written by the following two or more applications including network
functions. While an application reads and writes one byte of PMC signals, other
applications may write the same byte.
3 Be careful enough if you process a PMC signal set that is related to a CNC
function by using the following two or more applications including network
functions. Because they are executed based on each individual cycles (in other
words, asynchronous cycles), there is a possibility that the CNC may receive
the PMC signal set in an unexpected order.

s-3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-64014EN/06

WARNING
4 Generally, when multi-byte data are read or written at once among the
following two or more applications including network functions, the coherency
of the read multi-byte data (in other words, reading all latest data at once) is not
guaranteed. To ensure the coherency of the multi-byte data, prepare flags to
notify the completion of reading or writing process that is separated from the
entity of the data and make the handshaking process to access the data by
using the flags.
Data List Table
Category Data
Parameter, Tool compensation value and related data,
Work zero offset value and related data,
Workpiece coordinate system shift value and related data,
Macro variable, P-CODE variable, Program and related data,
General data for CNC
Tool management function data, Tool life management data,
Error compensation related data ,
Overtravel check (Interference check) related data ,
Software operator’s panel related data
PMC data PMC signal, PMC parameter
Tool data for punch press and related data, Safety zone data and related data,
Data for Laser, Laser cutting condition data and related data, Laser oscillator setting data and
Punch press or Wire cut related data, Wire consumption compensation data, Guide position
compensation data, Workpiece leveling data
Other data Parameters for Data Server, Parameters for network setting

List Table of Applications and Network Functions

Category Functions
PMC Ladder, Macro Executor, C Language Executor, FANUC PICTURE,
Applications
FOCAS2
FL-net, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, Modbus/TCP, PROFIBUS-DP, DeviceNet,
Network functions
CC-Link
5 CNC has functions that read or write PMC signals in other than the G/F
address. Be careful enough if the above mentioned applications and network
read or write PMC signals used by these functions. When reading or writing the
same PMC signal, applications or CNC functions may work in an unexpected
manner.
For the relevant CNC functions, refer to "LIST OF FUNCTIONS USING PMC
SIGNALS OTHER THAN G/F ADDRESS " in Appendix in the CONNECTION
MANUAL (FUNCTION) of the relevant CNC.

s-4
B-64014EN/06 TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS........................................................................... S-1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ............................................. s-1
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS............................................................... s-2
GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT..................... s-3

I. GENERAL
1 GENERAL ............................................................................................... 3
1.1 ORGANIZATION ........................................................................................... 3
1.2 APPLICABLE MODELS................................................................................. 3
1.3 RELATED MANUALS.................................................................................... 4

II. SPECIFICATION
1 PREFACE................................................................................................ 7
1.1 HARDWARE ON WHICH Ethernet OPERATES ........................................... 7
1.2 COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS OPERATING ON HARDWARE
OPTIONS ...................................................................................................... 8
1.3 Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B AND Power Motion i-A ............................................ 9
1.3.1 RELATED NC PARAMETERS..............................................................................9
1.3.2 Checking the Selected Hardware Option ...............................................................10
1.3.3 Screen Layout.........................................................................................................11

2 DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS ............................................................... 12

2.1 DATA SERVER FILE MANAGEMENT ........................................................ 13
2.1.1 File Names of CNC File Management ...................................................................13
2.1.2 Number of Files Which Can Be Registered on a Data Server................................14
2.1.3 Text Files and Binary Files ....................................................................................14
2.2 DATA SERVER MODES ............................................................................. 15
2.3 DETAILS OF THE BUFFER MODE............................................................. 17
2.4 OPERATION FROM A DATA SERVER ...................................................... 20
2.4.1 Subprogram Search during Memory Operation .....................................................21
2.5 NC PROGRAM FORMAT............................................................................ 22
2.6 LIST FILE FORMAT .................................................................................... 23
2.7 DATASERVER Explorer CONNECTION ..................................................... 25
2.8 ISO CODE INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION .................................................... 26
3 FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS........................................................... 29
4 DNS/DHCP CLIENT FUNCTIONS ........................................................ 30
5 MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS................................... 31
6 UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION ............................................ 32
7 FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION ....................................................... 34

c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64014EN/06

III. SETTING
1 SETTING THE COMMUNICATION FUNCTION ................................... 37
1.1 BACKING UP/RESTORING COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS............... 37
1.1.1 Related NC Parameters...........................................................................................40

2 SETTING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS....................................... 41

2.1 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER SETTING SCREEN ............................. 42
2.2 RELATED NC PARAMETERS .................................................................... 49
2.3 EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS ..................... 56
3 SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS .................................. 57
3.1 OPERATING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet SETTING SCREEN ......................... 57
3.2 RELATED NC PARAMETERS .................................................................... 59
3.3 EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS.................. 60
4 SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION................................................ 61
4.1 SETTING OF DNS....................................................................................... 61
4.2 SETTING OF DHCP .................................................................................... 62
4.3 RELATED NC PARAMETERS .................................................................... 64
4.4 EXAMPLE OF SETTING DNS/DHCP.......................................................... 64
4.4.1 When DNS/DHCP is Used with the Data Server ...................................................64
4.4.2 When DHCP is Used with the FTP Server Function of the Data Server ...............65
4.4.3 When DHCP is Used with the FOCAS2/Ethernet Function ..................................66

5 SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS .......... 68

5.1 OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS SETTING SCREEN. 68
5.2 RELATED NC PARAMETERS .................................................................... 72
5.3 CONTROLLING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
FROM THE PMC ......................................................................................... 73
5.3.1 Signals ....................................................................................................................73
5.3.2 Signal Timing Charts..............................................................................................75
5.3.2.1 When the start of machine remote diagnosis is accepted................................... 76
5.3.2.2 When the start of machine remote diagnosis is rejected.................................... 76
5.3.2.3 When machine remote diagnosis is forcibly terminated .................................... 77
5.4 EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS
FUNCTIONS................................................................................................ 77
6 SETTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION................. 79
6.1 SETTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION .......................... 79
6.1.1 Selection of Mode ..................................................................................................82
6.1.2 Setting Method by CNC Screen .............................................................................83
6.1.3 Setting Method by Personal Computer...................................................................87
6.2 EXECUTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION..................... 88
6.2.1 When Using a PMC Address for Control (Response Notice method) ...................88
6.2.2 When Using a PMC Address for Control (Simple Method) ..................................90
6.2.3 When Using a Macro Variable for Control (Simple Method)................................91
6.3 RELATED NC PARAMETERS .................................................................... 94
7 SETTING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION............................... 96
7.1 SETTING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION ..................................... 97
c-2
B-64014EN/06 TABLE OF CONTENTS

7.2 RELATED NC PARAMETERS .................................................................... 99

8 ERROR MESSAGES DISPLAYED DURING PARAMETER
SETTING ............................................................................................. 102

IV. OPERATION
1 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS............................... 105
1.1 DEVICE CHANGE ON THE PROGRAM FOLDER SCREEN.................... 105
1.2 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FILE LIST SCREEN .......................... 106
1.2.1 Displaying and Operating the File List ................................................................110
1.2.2 File Transfer Operation ........................................................................................116
1.2.3 Preparations for File Operation and Editing.........................................................117
1.2.4 File Operation between the Data Server and USB Memory.................................118
1.3 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST SCREEN ............... 121
1.3.1 Displaying and Operating the File List ................................................................123
1.3.2 File Transfer Operation ........................................................................................125
1.3.3 Preparations for File Operation ............................................................................127
1.4 M198-BASED SUBPROGRAM CALL........................................................ 128
1.5 DNC OPERATION..................................................................................... 129
1.6 NC PROGRAM INPUT .............................................................................. 130
1.7 NC PROGRAM OUTPUT .......................................................................... 130
1.8 FTP SERVER FUNCTIONS ...................................................................... 132
2 OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS .. 133
2.1 OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS SCREEN ............... 133
2.1.1 Selecting an Inquiry Destination ..........................................................................134
2.1.2 Starting Diagnosis ................................................................................................134
2.1.2.1 Diagnosis status ............................................................................................... 134
2.1.2.2 Error numbers and error messages................................................................... 135
2.1.3 Forcibly Terminating Diagnosis...........................................................................136

3 OPERATING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION....................... 137

3.1 DEVICE CHANGE ON THE PROGRAM FOLDER SCREEN.................... 138
3.2 OPERATING THE FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE LIST SCREEN.............. 139
3.2.1 Displaying and Operating the File List ................................................................140
3.3 NC PROGRAM INPUT .............................................................................. 143
3.4 NC PROGRAM OUTPUT .......................................................................... 143

V. CONNECTION
1 SETTING ............................................................................................. 147
1.1 Series 30i/31i/32i-A ................................................................................... 147
1.1.1 Specifications .......................................................................................................147
1.1.2 Installation ............................................................................................................147
1.1.2.1 Installation on an LCD-mounted type unit ...................................................... 147
1.1.2.2 Installation on a stand-alone type unit ............................................................. 148
1.1.2.3 Total connection diagram ................................................................................ 149
1.1.2.4 Installing a memory card ................................................................................. 149
1.2 Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B AND Power Motion i-A ........................................ 151
1.2.1 Specifications .......................................................................................................151
1.2.2 Installation ............................................................................................................152
c-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64014EN/06

1.2.2.1 Installation on an LCD-mounted type unit ...................................................... 152

1.2.2.2 Installation on a stand-alone type unit ............................................................. 153
1.2.2.3 Total connection diagram ................................................................................ 154
1.2.2.4 Installing a memory card ................................................................................. 154

2 CABLE CONNECTION ....................................................................... 156

2.1 CONNECTING TO Ethernet ...................................................................... 156
2.2 LEADING OUT THE Ethernet CABLE ....................................................... 157
2.3 RJ-45 CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS ............................................... 158
2.4 TWISTED-PAIR CABLE SPECIFICATION ................................................ 159
2.4.1 Cable Connection .................................................................................................159
2.4.2 Cable Materials.....................................................................................................159
2.4.3 Connector Specification .......................................................................................161
2.5 ELECTRICAL NOISE COUNTERMEASURES.......................................... 161
2.5.1 Separating Signal Lines........................................................................................161
2.5.2 Clamping and Shielding Cables ...........................................................................161
2.5.3 Grounding the Network........................................................................................164
2.6 CHECK ITEMS AT INSTALLATION .......................................................... 166

VI. MAINTENANCE
1 HARDWARE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION.................................. 171
1.1 Series 30i/31i/32i-A ................................................................................... 171
1.1.1 Component Layout ...............................................................................................171
1.1.2 LED Indications and Meanings ............................................................................172
1.2 Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B AND Power Motion i-A ........................................ 174
1.2.1 Component Layout ...............................................................................................174
1.2.2 LED Indications and Meanings ............................................................................175

2 SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION................................... 178

2.1 Ethernet LOG ............................................................................................ 178
2.2 ETHERNET CONNECTION CONFIRMATION.......................................... 183
2.3 COMMUNICATION STATE CONFIRMATION........................................... 185
2.4 COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE CONFIRMATION.................................. 186
2.5 FTP SERVER MAINTENANCE ................................................................. 187
2.6 ALARM AND DIAGNOSIS DATA .............................................................. 190
2.7 COMMUNICATION RETRY MONITORING FUNCTION........................... 191

APPENDIX
A TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................................ 195
A.1 CHECKING COMMUNICATION WITH A HUB.......................................... 195
A.2 CHECKING SETTINGS............................................................................. 195
A.3 CHECKING COMMUNICATION................................................................ 196
B EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP ................................................. 199
B.1 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows 2000 Professional (FOR
INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE) ..................................................... 199
B.2 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows XP Professional (FOR
INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE) ..................................................... 210

c-4
B-64014EN/06 TABLE OF CONTENTS

B.3 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows Vista (FOR INTERNET

INFORMATION SERVICE)........................................................................ 229
B.4 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows 7 (FOR INTERNET
INFORMATION SERVICE)........................................................................ 246
B.5 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows 8 (FOR INTERNET
INFORMATION SERVICE)........................................................................ 268
C EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP ........................................... 292
C.1 EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DHCP SERVER OF Windows 2000 Server. 293
C.2 EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS SERVER OF Windows 2000 Server ... 299
D FTP CLIENT OPERATION.................................................................. 304
D.1 OPERATION USING THE FTP COMMAND.............................................. 304
D.2 OPERATION USING THE Explorer........................................................... 306
D.2.1 Displaying the File List ........................................................................................306
D.2.2 File Operation and File Transfer ..........................................................................319
D.3 SECURITY UNBLOCKING IN Windows XP (Service Pack 2) / Vista ........ 322

c-5
I. GENERAL
B-64014EN/06 GENERAL 1.GENERAL

1 GENERAL
This chapter explains the organization of this manual and how to read this manual.

1.1 ORGANIZATION
This manual consists of the following parts:

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
This section describes the precautions to be observed when reading this manual.
I. GENERAL
This part describes the chapter organization, applicable models, and related manuals.
II. SPECIFICATION
This part describes the specifications of the functions that operate on the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data
Server.
III. SETTING
This part describes the method of setting.
IV. OPERATION
This part describes the method of operating the Data Server functions, machine remote diagnosis
functions, and FTP file transfer function.
V. CONNECTION
This part describes the method of connection and provides notes.
VI. MAINTENANCE
This part describes hardware and software maintenance information.
APPENDIX
These appendixes describe additional information such as that related to troubleshooting, the
operation of the FTP client, and how to set up the FTP server.

1.2 APPLICABLE MODELS

This Operator's Manual covers the following models.
The abbreviations in the following table are sometimes used in text descriptions.

Model name Abbreviation

FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A Series 30i -A
FANUC Series 31i-MODEL A
Series 31i -A Series 30i/31i/32i -A
FANUC Series 31i-MODEL A5
FANUC Series 32i-MODEL A Series 32i -A
Series
FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B Series 30i -B
Series 30i/31i/32i -A/B,
FANUC Series 31i-MODEL B Series 35i -B, PMi -A
Series 31i -B 30i/31i/32i/35i -B
FANUC Series 31i-MODEL B5 30i/31i/32i -B
or
FANUC Series 32i-MODEL B Series 32i -B
30i/31i/32i/35i -B
FANUC Series 35i-MODEL B Series 35i -B Series 35i -B
FANUC Power Motion i-MODEL A Power Motion i -A Power Motion i -A PMi -A

-3-
1.GENERAL GENERAL B-64014EN/06

1.3 RELATED MANUALS

The table below lists manuals related to this manual.
Refer to these manuals when you use this manual. This manual is indicated by an asterisk(*).

Specification
Manual name
number
Related to Series 30i/31i/32i-A
DESCRIPTIONS B-63942EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B-63943EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-63943EN-1
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) B-63944EN
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe System) B-63944EN-1
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Center System) B-63944EN-2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-63945EN
PARAMETER MANUAL B-65950EN
Related to Series 30i/31i/32i-B
DESCRIPTIONS B-64482EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B-64483EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-64483EN-1
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) B-64484EN
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe System) B-64484EN-1
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Center System) B-64484EN-2
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-64485EN
PARAMETER MANUAL B-64490EN
Related to Series 35i-B
DESCRIPTIONS B-64522EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B-64523EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-64523EN-1
OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64524EN
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-64525EN
PARAMETER MANUAL B-64530EN
Related to Power Motion i-A
DESCRIPTIONS B-64572EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B-64573EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-64573EN-1
OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64574EN
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-64575EN
PARAMETER MANUAL B-64580EN
PMC
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL B-63983EN
FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-MODEL B, Power Motion i-A PMCPROGRAMMING B-64513EN
MANUAL
Network
PROFIBUS-DP Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-63993EN
Industrial Ethernet CONNECTION MANUAL B-64013EN
Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64014EN *
DeviceNet Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-64043EN
FL-net Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-64163EN
CC-Link Board CONNECTION MANUAL B-64463EN
Machine Remote Diagnosis
Machine Remote Diagnosis Package OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-63734EN

-4-
II. SPECIFICATION
B-64014EN/06 SPECIFICATION 1.PREFACE

1 PREFACE
WARNING
Fully understand the instructions described in this manual before starting
operation. If you start operation before fully understanding them, the machine
may behave unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the tool, machine, and/or
workpiece, or injury to the user.

CAUTION
1 If connecting to communication devices made by other companies, thoroughly
read the manuals supplied with the communication devices made by the other
companies and sufficiently conduct connection tests beforehand.
2 Be sure to read through this part, "SPECIFICATION".

1.1 HARDWARE ON WHICH Ethernet OPERATES

In a CNC system, Ethernet operates on the following hardware components.
This manual covers the hardware options listed below.

Embedded Ethernet
Embedded Ethernet is a built-in Ethernet circuit mounted on the main board or stand-alone type LCD unit
supporting Windows CE.
(Connector name: CD38A or CD38S)

Hardware option
A hardware option is an Ethernet hardware component prepared as a CNC option.
There are the following two types of hardware options.

Kind Description
Fast Ethernet circuit mounted on the main board of the LCD-mounted type Series
30i/31i/32i/35i-B or LCD-mounted type Power Motion i-A
Multi-function Ethernet
(Connector name: CD38B)
Multi-function Ethernet may be referred to as "Fast Ethernet".
Option board mounted in an optional slot (slots 1 to 4)
(Connector name: CD38R)
An option board on which an ATA Flash card or Compact Flash Card (referred to
Fast Ethernet board as a memory card below) is mounted to enable the Data Server functions to
operate may be referred to as "Fast Data Server" or "Fast Data Server board".
An option board on which no memory card is mounted may be referred to as "Fast
Ethernet" or "Fast Ethernet board".

NOTE
Note the following restrictions on hardware options:
- The Data Server function cannot be used on Multi-function Ethernet.
- The Data Server function cannot be used on the Series 35i-B or Power
Motion i-A.
- Multi-function Ethernet cannot be used on a stand-alone type CNC.

-7-
1.PREFACEPREFACE SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/06

1.2 COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS OPERATING ON

HARDWARE OPTIONS
The following communication functions can be operated on hardware options.

Communication function Detailed in Embedded Ethernet

Data Server functions (Note 1) Chapter 2 in this Part Unavailable
FOCAS2/Ethernet functions (Note 2) Chapter 3 in this Part Available
Ethernet function DNS/DHCP functions (Note 3) Chapter 4 in this Part Available
/ Data Server Machine remote diagnosis functions
Chapter 5 in this Part Unavailable
function (Note 2)
Unsolicited messaging function (Note 2) Chapter 6 in this Part Available
FTP file transfer function (Note 2) Chapter 7 in this Part Available
FL-net Connection
FL-net functions Unavailable
Industrial Manual (B-64163EN)
Ethernet EtherNet/IP functions Industrial Ethernet Unavailable
(Note 4) Modbus/TCP functions Connection Manual Available
PROFINET functions (B-64013EN) Unavailable

NOTE
1 To use the Data Server functions, the Data Server function option (S737) is
required.
The string in the parentheses following the function option name indicates the
last four digits of the ordering number of the function option. The same applies to
the following description.
2 To use the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, machine remote diagnosis functions,
unsolicited messaging function, and FTP file transfer function, the Ethernet
function option (S707) is required.
3 To use the DNS/DHCP functions, either of the Ethernet function option (S707)
and Data Server function option (S737) is required.
4 To use Industrial Ethernet, refer to the relevant connection manual.

-8-
B-64014EN/06 SPECIFICATION 1.PREFACE

NOTE
5 For detailed information of the use of the embedded Ethernet, refer to the
chapter titled "EMBEDDED Ethernet FUNCTION" in the relevant CNC
maintenance manual. Note the following points:
- The number of FOCAS2/Ethernet clients that can be connected concurrently
with the embedded Ethernet is smaller than that with the hardware option.
Hardware option Embedded Ethernet
Number of clients that can be connected concurrently Up to 20 Up to 5
Number of PCs that can be connected concurrently Up to 20 1 (recommended)
- To use the unsolicited messaging function on the embedded Ethernet in the
Series 30i/31i/32i-A, the Enhanced Embedded Ethernet function option
(R952) is required.
- Since communication using embedded Ethernet is processed by the CPU in
the CNC, the CNC operation status may affect the communication
performance of embedded Ethernet and communication using embedded
Ethernet may also affect CNC processing.
For example, since embedded Ethernet operates with priority lower than that
given to automatic or manual operation performed for each axis, the
communication rate may be slower during automatic operation or operation
with many controlled axes.
Meanwhile, since embedded Ethernet operates with priority higher than that
given to the CNC screen display processing, C Language Executor (other
than high-level tasks), and other processing, communication using embedded
Ethernet may reduce the performance of the processing.
- Carefully connect embedded Ethernet to an intracompany network handling
much broadcast data because broadcast data processing takes time, which
may affect the performance of the CNC screen display processing and
others.

1.3 Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B AND Power Motion i-A

With the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B and Power Motion i-A, Multi-function Ethernet or the Fast Ethernet
board can be selected as the hardware option using NC parameters.

1.3.1 RELATED NC PARAMETERS

0970 Select hardware option that operates Ethernet or Data Server function

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] -1 to 6
Hardware option that operates each function is selected.

Value Hardware option

-1 Not used
0 Unsetting (initial value) (NOTE 1)
1 Multi-function Ethernet (NOTE 2)
2 (reserved)
3 Fast Ethernet board mounted (slot1)
4 Fast Ethernet board mounted (slot2)

-9-
1.PREFACE SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/06

Value Hardware option

5 Fast Ethernet board mounted (slot3)
6 Fast Ethernet board mounted (slot4)

NOTE
1 When only one hardware option is mounted and no function option
related to Industrial Ethernet is specified, parameter No. 970 need
not be changed from 0 (initial value).
2 The Data Server function cannot be used on Multi-function
Ethernet.
If the Data Server function option (S737) is specified, do not set 1
(Multi-function Ethernet) to parameter No. 970.
3 The Ethernet functions and Data Server functions cannot be used
on different hardware options.
4 After changing parameter No. 970, turn the power off.
When parameter No. 970 is changed and the power is turned off,
then on again, alarm PW0050, "POWER MUST BE OFF
(INITIALIZED COMMUNICATION)" or alarm SR2038 "WRONG
COMMUNICATION COMBINATION" may be issued.
If alarm PW0050 is issued, turn the power to the CNC off, then on
again.
If alarm SR2038 is issued, see Section 2.6, "ALARM AND
DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION" in Part VI, "MAINTENANCE" and
review the setting.

1.3.2 Checking the Selected Hardware Option

With the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B and Power Motion i-A, the selected hardware option can be confirmed
in the title bar of the setting, maintenance, or log screen of each communication function.
In the example below, [MULTI-FUNC ETHER] is selected as the hardware option.

- 10 -
B-64014EN/06 SPECIFICATION 1.PREFACE

Title Description
Fast Ethernet circuit mounted on the main board of the LCD-mounted type Series
[MUTI-FUNC ETHER]
30i/31i/32i/35i-B and LCD-mounted type Power Motion i-A
[BOARD(SLOT1)] Fast Ethernet board mounted in the optional slot 1
[BOARD(SLOT2)] Fast Ethernet board mounted in the optional slot 2
[BOARD(SLOT3)] Fast Ethernet board mounted in the optional slot 3
[BOARD(SLOT4)] Fast Ethernet board mounted in the optional slot 4

1.3.3 Screen Layout

In this manual, each screen has described the example of the screen of Series 30i/31i/32i-A.
The basic content is the same though a detailed layout might be different from that of the Series
30i/31i/32i/35i-B or Power Motion i-A.

- 11 -
2.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/06

2 DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS

The Data Server functions use a memory card built into a board for storing files and can transfer files and
perform DNC operation using FTP.
A Data Server can operate on both FTP client and FTP server.
When you use a CNC to transfer files, the Data Server operates as an FTP client and communicates with
the FTP server on the host computer.
When you use the host computer to transfer files, the Data Server operates as an FTP server and
communicates with the FTP client on the host computer.

WARNING
1 To input or output data, the use of the ISO code input/output function is
recommended.
Parity information is not contained with data input/output using the ASCII code.
So, the use of the ASCII code is dangerous since any data corrupted during
input/output operation with the CNC is not detected.
During DNC operation using a Data Server, data input using the ASCII code is
also dangerous since parity information is not contained and any corrupted data
in a read program is not detected.
If data corruption occurs, the machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly
causing damage to the tool, machine, and/or workpiece, or injury to the user.
For details of the ISO code input/output function, see Section 2.8, "ISO CODE
INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION".
With the Series 30i/31i/32i-A, the ISO code input/output function cannot be
used.
2 The memory card used for a Data Server can be deteriorated by writing data too
many times. If a deteriorated memory card is used, the operation performance
may be affected because it takes time to read data, or the machine may behave
unexpectedly because correct data cannot be read, possibly causing damage to
the tool, machine, and/or workpiece, or injury to the user.
For this reason, avoid operation involved with frequent rewriting.

NOTE
1 Before communicating with the host computer using the Data Server functions,
completely confirm that there is no problem with the entire system including
communication with the personal computer because the personal computer
environment may affect communication operation.
2 When the host computer operates as an FTP server, FTP server software must
be run on the host computer. When the host computer operates as an FTP
client, FTP client software must be run on the host computer.

- 12 -
B-64014EN/06 SPECIFICATION 2.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS

2.1 DATA SERVER FILE MANAGEMENT

With the Data Server functions, you can format the built-in memory card in the CNC file management
mode to manage NC programs.

CNC file management

For NC programs managed in the CNC file management mode, memory operation such as custom macro
commands and M98-based subprogram calling are available. Operate the NC programs using the
PROGRAM FOLDER screen in the same way as for NC programs in the CNC memory.
As a CNC external input/output device, DNC operation and M198-based subprogram calling are available.
In this case, operate NC programs using the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen.

Edit operation
PROGRAM FOLDER screen

CNC file management Memory operation

DATA SERVER FILE LIST

(DNC operation is also available.)
screen
File transfer operation

NOTE
1 The Data Server for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A/B allows editing and memory
operation of NC programs stored on the memory card, so the method of
managing files on the memory card differs from the file management method of
Data Servers for the Series 16i-B and so on. Note that, therefore, the memory
card of the 30i-A is not compatible with the memory cards of Data Servers for
the Series 16i-B and so on.
2 For operation and details of the PROGRAM FOLDER screen, refer to Chapter,
"PROGRAM MANAGEMENT" in the "OPERATOR’S MANUAL" of the relevant
CNC.
3 For operation and details of the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen, refer to
Chapter 1, "OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS," in Part IV,
"OPERATION."

2.1.1 File Names of CNC File Management

You can assign a file name and folder name to a file managed in the CNC file management mode in the
same way as for CNC memory.
• Up to 32 characters
• Alphabetic characters (in upper and lower cases), numeric characters, and four symbols (+, -, _,
and .)

NOTE
1 File names are case-sensitive.
2 Any file name or folder name cannot begin with a period (.).
3 It is impossible to assign the same name to a file and a folder.
4 Up to six levels of folders can be created.

- 13 -
2.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/06

File names and program numbers

When a file name assigned to a file consists of uppercase O and a numeric value, the file name is treated
as a program number.
Values ranging from 1 to 9999 can be used (values ranging from 1 to 99999999 can be used according to
the parameter setting).
A value beyond this range cannot be used for a file name in the program number format.

Example)
File names that can be used as program numbers
“O0123” Program number 123
“O0001” Program number 1
“O3000” Program number 3000
“O9999” Program number 9999
File names that cannot be used as program numbers
“ABC” (Does not have the format "O plus a numeric value")
“o123” (Does not begin with uppercase letter "O")
“O123.4” (Uses a character other than numeric characters)

NOTE
When files on a Data Server are managed by program number, their program
numbers always consist of "O" plus a 4-digit number ("O" plus a 8-digit number).
So, even if there are files managed with different file names such as "O1" and
"O01" on a personal computer, their program numbers are regarded as the
same when these files are transferred to the Data Server.

2.1.2 Number of Files Which Can Be Registered on a Data Server

In the initial status, the maximum number of files which can be registered on a memory card on a Data
Server is 2047 and the maximum file size is 512 MB. Each folder is counted as one file.
The maximum number of files and the maximum file size can be changed using parameter No. 930.
For details, see Section 2.2, "RELATED NC PARAMETERS," in Part III, "SETTING."

2.1.3 Text Files and Binary Files

You can store the following two types of files on a memory card on a Data Server: text files and binary
files.
Whether a program on a Data Server is a text or binary file can be checked by pressing soft key [DETAIL
ON] in the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen. When a program is a binary file, "R/B" is displayed.
For a text file, memory operation and edit operation as well as DNC operation can be performed by
selecting it as a main program.
For binary files, only DNC operation is available, but programs for high-speed binary operation can be
handled.

The following table lists differences between text files and binary files.
Operation
Attribute of file Selected as a Memory DNC Subprogram calling Editing
main program operation operation M98 M198
Text file Available Available Available Available
Available Available
Binary file Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable

- 14 -
B-64014EN/06 SPECIFICATION 2.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS
Follow the procedures below to specify a text or binary file:
(1) When registering a file from the CNC
In the DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen, to register a file as a text file, use [GET], or to
register it as a text file, use [BGET].
(2) When registering a file from the host computer
A parameter is available to set whether to register a file as a text or binary file. For details, see
Section 2.2, "RELATED NC PARAMETERS" in Part III, "SETTING".

If NC data other than an NC program is not handled as a binary file, it may not be able to be input or
output correctly. NC data output and stored on a memory card on a Data Server from the CNC is
automatically handled as a binary file. A file to be transferred from a personal computer to a memory card
on a Data Server must be specified explicitly as a binary file.

NOTE
1 An NC program stored as a text file is converted to an editable file format so that
the file can be edited on the CNC. For this reason, when a text file is read from
the host computer to the memory card on the Data Server, then the file is
transferred to the host computer, binary compatibility can no longer be
maintained.
2 The file name of a text file and the O number or arbitrary file name in the
program are always the same. See Section 2.5, “NC PROGRAM FORMAT” for
details

2.2 DATA SERVER MODES

Each Data Server mode determines the input or output destination when a Data Server is operated as a
CNC external input/output device. You can select one of the following three modes.

NOTE
1 Data Server modes are valid only when the Data Server is operated as an
external storage device of the CNC. In case of main program operation for
editing and a memory operation and an M98-based subprogram call, programs
on the memory card of the Data Server are selected regardless of the Data
Server mode.
2 When a file is input to or output from the Data Server board with the FTP server
function by operating an FTP client on the host computer, there is no difference
in operation among Data Server modes.

Storage mode
The memory card built into the Data Server is selected as the external input/output device.
For example, when DNC operation or M198-based subprogram calling is executed, the relevant NC
program is called from the memory card built into the Data Server.
When input operation is executed for the Data Server, the relevant NC program is read from the memory
card built into the Data Server.
Conversely, when NC program output operation is executed for the Data Server, the output NC program
is written on the memory card built into the Data Server.

- 15 -
2.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/06

Input
CNC memory
Data Server Output
Memory card
DNC operation

FTP mode
The host computer connected to the Data Server is selected as the external input/output device.
For example, when DNC operation or M198-based subprogram calling is executed, the relevant NC
program is called from the host computer.
When input operation is executed for the Data Server, the relevant NC program is read from the host
computer connected to the Data Server.
Conversely, when NC program output operation is executed for the Data Server, the output NC program
is directly written on the host computer.
Data Server
Input
CNC memory
Host computer
Output

DNC operation

CAUTION
1 In the FTP mode, an NC program is transferred from the host computer to the
CNC. For this reason, if the line is disconnected during communication for some
reason such as noise on the network, the disconnection directly affects the CNC
operation as compared with the storage mode. Before DNC operation in the FTP
mode, surely take measures to prevent noise and make sure that good
communication conditions are present.
2 When feed hold is performed during DNC operation in the FTP mode,
communication with the host computer may be stopped. In this case, the host
computer may disconnect the communication. Perform feed hold during a trial
run and completely confirm that the communication with the host computer is not
disconnected.
This symptom is generally caused because the CNC data read speed is slow
and the host computer causes a timeout. Depending on the machining program,
the host computer may cause a timeout even when communication is not
stopped by feed hold. If this symptom occurs, use DNC operation in the FTP
mode while being careful not to cause a timeout, or use DNC operation in the
storage mode, and not in the FTP mode.

Buffer mode

The host computer connected to the Data Server is selected as the external input device.
In the buffer mode unlike the FTP mode, however, areas on the memory card built into the Data Server
are used as intermediate buffers. For details of the buffer mode, see Section 2.3, "DETAILS OF THE
BUFFER MODE," which is the following section.
As the external output device, the memory card built into the Data Server is selected. When NC program
output operation is performed, the operation equivalent to that in the storage mode is performed.

- 16 -
B-64014EN/06 SPECIFICATION 2.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS

Data Server Output

Memory card CNC memory
Input
Intermediate
Host computer buffers
DNC operation

NOTE
1 With the Series 30i/31i-A, to use the buffer mode, the buffer mode function
option (J728) is required.
2 With the Series 32i-A, the buffer mode cannot be used.

2.3 DETAILS OF THE BUFFER MODE

In the buffer mode, two areas (areas A and B) are prepared on the memory card. While the NC program
data stored in one area is being supplied to the CNC, the subsequent NC program data is read in the other
area from the host computer using FTP transfer. When all data in the former area has been supplied to the
CNC, the data in the latter area is supplied to the CNC. In the former area, which becomes empty, the
subsequent NC program data is read from the host computer using FTP transfer.
Repeating this operation enables an NC program larger than the capacity of the memory card to be
handled. To use the buffer mode, however, the original NC program must be divided into some files on
the host computer in advance.
The size of a divided file must be smaller than half the remaining capacity of the memory card. If the size
of a divided file is too large (for example, 100 MB or more), it takes much time to read the first file from
the host computer and it also takes time until operation starts.

Using the buffer mode

In the buffer mode, a file (such as Oxxxx) called by DNC operation or M198-based subprogram calling is
a file list. The file list contains the names of files to be called in the order in which they are to be called.
In the buffer mode, the Data Server sequentially calls the files specified in the file list from the host
computer and supplies data to the CNC.

CNC Data Server Host computer

Program Hard disk

call get (FTP)
Oxxxx Memory card Oxxxx
file1 Contents
Area A file2 of Oxxxx
file3 file1
file1 Area B file4
file2 file2
file5 file3
file3
file4 file4
file5 file5

- 17 -
2.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/06

Files (file1 to file5) specified in the file list on the host computer are stored on the memory card built into
the Data Server using FTP transfer and supplied to the CNC. In the buffer mode, after the CNC issues a
request to read an NC program to the Data Server, the specified file list is read from the host computer.
When the first file has been read, the Data Server starts supplying data to the CNC. For this reason, it
takes time from when the CNC issues a request to read a program to when the Data Server starts
supplying data.
While the Data Server is supplying the data in one area to the CNC, it stores data into the other area using
FTP transfer. For this reason, divide the original program data so that two consecutive files can be
contained on the memory card built into the Data Server.
Although the data in one area has been supplied to the CNC, FTP transfer may not terminate for the other
area. In this case, program calling terminates abnormally because the subsequent data cannot be supplied.
You can use a parameter not to cause the abnormal termination.
In the file list, you can specify any file name allowed by the host computer that consists of up to 255
single-byte alphanumeric characters. Be sure to specify at least one LF (0A in hexadecimal) or CR (0D in
hexadecimal) following each file name in the file list to delimit the file names.

NOTE
In the buffer mode, you can also register a new file on the memory card built into
the Data Server by the "NC program GET" or "NC program output" operation.
By this operation, however, the remaining capacity of the memory card built into
the Data Server that is required for operation in the buffer mode may be
exhausted, resulting in an error in DNC operation in the buffer mode.
For this reason, during DNC operation in the buffer mode, do not register any
new file on the memory card built into the Data Server.

Dividing an NC program into files

To perform operation in the buffer mode, divide an original NC program into several files on the host
computer and create a file list indicating the order in which the divided files are to be transferred in
advance.

- 18 -
B-64014EN/06 SPECIFICATION 2.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS
Example)
Dividing an NC program into three files

% %
O1234(SAMPLE); O1234(SAMPLE);
: :
: :
Dividing the
: :
program into
X1.Y1.Z1.; three files X1.Y1.Z1.; file1
X2.Y2.Z2.;
: X2.Y2.Z2.;
: :
: :
X3.Y3.Z3.; :
X4.Y4.Z4.; X3.Y3.Z3.; file2
:
: X4.Y4.Z4.;
: :
M30; :
% :
M30;
% file3

file1
file2
file3 O1234

As shown above, divide an original NC file into three files, file1, file2, and file3. Specify the divided file
names in the file list (file name: O1234).

CAUTION
In the above example, the NC program is divided into files so that any block is
not divided. You can divide a program at a point in a block. When dividing a
program at a point in a block, be careful so that any unnecessary character is
not inserted at the end of each file.
If an unnecessary character is inserted at the end of a file, the NC program may
perform unexpected operation when executed. Be very careful when preparing
and editing an NC program on the host computer.

NOTE
1 Divide an NC program into files so that each file size is about 20 to 30 MB. If the
file size is too large, it takes time until DNC operation starts. If the file size is too
small, data transmission may stop between files and operation may stop.
2 Although you can divide an NC program at a point in a block, divide the program
in block units whenever possible and retract the tool at the end of each divided
file. This prevents data transmission from stopping at the end of a file and cutter
marking from being made.
3 Store the file list and relevant divided files in the same folder (directory) on the
same host computer.

- 19 -
2.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/06

2.4 OPERATION FROM A DATA SERVER

NOTE
The Data Server functions produce an effect when large NC programs are
operated. Use the Data Server Functions to handle large NC programs.

Memory operation
You can perform memory operation for an NC program on the memory card built into a Data Server in
the same way as for an NC program in the CNC memory.
You can also supply an NC program simultaneously for a multipath CNC system.

NOTE
When memory operation is performed, a selected NC program on the Data
Server must be a text file. It is impossible to use a binary file for memory
operation.

M198 subprogram operation

In the storage mode, you can perform M198 calling from the memory card built into a Data Server. In the
FTP or buffer mode, you can perform M198 calling form the host computer.
On the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen, set an M198 folder in advance. When M198 calling is
specified, the set M198 folder is searched for the target subprogram.

DNC operation
In the storage mode, you can perform DNC operation from the memory card built into a Data Server. In
the FTP or buffer mode, you can perform DNC operation from the host computer.
On the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen, set the file name for DNC operation in advance. When DNC
operation starts, the set DNC operation file is called.

- 20 -
B-64014EN/06 SPECIFICATION 2.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS

2.4.1 Subprogram Search during Memory Operation

The subprogram search sequence during memory operation for an NC program on the memory card built
into a Data Server is the same during memory operation for an NC program in the CNC program
memory.

Order in which a subprogram is called from the main program on a Data Server (1) to (5)

Memory card built into CNC program

a Data Server memory

//DATA_SV //CNC_MEM

(1) Folder containing SYSTEM (5) System folder

the main program

MTB1 (4) MTB-de dicated folder 1

Main
DIR01 program
MTB2 (3) MTB-de dicated folder 2

DIR02
USER

PATH1

LIBRARY (2) Common program folder

NOTE
1 You can set whether to enable search (2) to (5) in the figure above with
parameter No. 3457. For details, see Series 30i/31i/32i-A Parameter Manual
(B-63950EN) or Series 30i/31i/32i -B Parameter Manual (B-64490EN).
2 On the memory card built into a Data Server, only the subprograms in the folder
containing the main program can be executed.
3 It takes time to call a program on the memory card built into a Data Server as a
subprogram as compared with the CNC memory. Be careful when calling many
small programs.

- 21 -
2.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/06

2.5 NC PROGRAM FORMAT

NC programs prepared on the host computer must have the following format:

% TITLE ;
O0001(COMMENT) ;
⋅
⋅
⋅
M30 ;
%

An NC program starts with a start file mark (%). In the subsequent part (leader section) until EOB (;,
program start) is encountered, a comment such as a title can be inserted as necessary.
At the beginning of the program section, be sure to specify an O number or arbitrary file name consisting
of up to 32 characters that is enclosed with “<” and “>” as the program name. This O number or file name
must be used for management on the personal computer.
If the O number or arbitrary file name in an NC program and the file name in the personal computer are
not the same, the file name in the personal computer is used basically when the program is transferred
from the personal computer to the Data Server (NOTE 2).
The semicolon ";" used at the end of each block means EOB (end of block) and actually functions as LF
(LF: 0A in hexadecimal), CR-LF (CR: 0D in hexadecimal), or LF-CR-CR.
The NC program must end with "M code ; %".
When performing binary input operation, insert data for binary input operation, enclosed with the start
code and end code of binary input operation, into the part ". . ." in the above figure.
For details of the NC program configuration and binary input operation, refer to the relevant CNC
OPERATOR’S MANUAL.

WARNING
If an NC program prepared on the host computer does not use the program
format specified by the CNC, executing the NC program can cause an
unpredictable operation. So, special care should be taken when an NC program
is prepared on the host computer.

NOTE
1 Any unrecognizable character codes in an NC program registered as a text file
on a memory card on a Data Server are ignored. Do not use any unrecognizable
character code.
A 2-byte code used for Japanese and others may be recognized as an invalid
character code when the system recognizes it on a byte-by-byte basis. Do not
use any 2-byte code used for Japanese and others.
2 The system always manages each text file on the memory card so that the file
name and the O number or arbitrary file name in the program are the same. For
this reason, if they are different, the system sets the O number or arbitrary file
name to the file name when transferring the file. The O number or arbitrary file
name in the program can also be set as the file name when the file is transferred
according to the parameter setting, however.

- 22 -
B-64014EN/06 SPECIFICATION 2.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS

2.6 LIST FILE FORMAT

In the LIST-GET, LIST-PUT, and LIST-DELETE functions described later, one of the following list file
formats must be used:

Format 1 Format 3
% ; % ;
O0001(COMMENT) ; O0001(COMMENT) ;
N111 ; (Dtsvr-File) ;
N222 ; (Dtsvr-File) ;
N333 ; (Dtsvr-File) ;
: :
: :
N999 ; (Dtsvr-File) ;
% %

Format 2 Format 4
% ; % ;
O0001(COMMENT) ; O0001(COMMENT) ;
N111 (PC-File) ; (Dtsvr-File, PC-File) ;
N222 (PC-File) ; (Dtsvr-File, PC-File) ;
N333 (PC-File) ; (Dtsvr-File, PC-File) ;
: :
: :
N999 (PC-File) ; (Dtsvr-File, PC-File) ;
% %

Specifications common to all formats

<1> A list file begins with a start file mark "%".
<2> In the next block, be sure to specify an O number. Assign this O number as the file name.
A comment enclosed in parentheses "(" and ")" can be inserted between the O number and EOB.
<3> In the subsequent blocks, specify files to be processed.
<4> The list file must end with "%".

Specifications of format 1
The following describes the specifications of list file format 1:
<1> This specification method applies when the file names of files to be processed have the format
"Oxxxx" (where "xxxx" denotes a 4-digit number). In this case, change "O" in file name "Oxxxx" to
"N" when specifying the file name. The 4-digit number can be zero-suppressed. The example shows
that files O0111, O0222, O0333, and so on up to O0999 are processed sequentially.
<2> The LIST-GET service transfers "Oxxxx" files stored on the built-in hard disk of the host computer
to the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server without modifying file names "Oxxxx". The
LIST-PUT service transfers "Oxxxx" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data
Server to the built-in hard disk of the host computer without modifying file names "Oxxxx". The
LIST-DELETE service deletes "Oxxxx" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data
Server.

- 23 -
2.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/06

Specifications of format 2
The following describes the specifications of list file format 2:
<1> This specification method applies when files to be processed are named "Oxxxx" (where "xxxx"
denotes a 4-digit number) on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server and are named
arbitrary file names on the built-in hard disk of the host computer. In this case, change "O" in file
name "Oxxxx" to "N" when specifying the file name on the Fast Data Server. The 4-digit number
can be zero-suppressed. The example shows that files O0111, O0222, O0333, and so on up to O0999
are processed sequentially.
A file name on the built-in hard disk of the host computer can be specified by enclosing it with
parentheses "(" and ")" following the corresponding "Nxxxx". The characters that can be used in file
names depend on the OS of the host computer.
<2> The LIST-GET service transfers files with arbitrary file names "PC-File" stored on the built-in hard
disk of the host computer to the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server as "Oxxxx" files. The
LIST-PUT service transfers "Oxxxx" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data
Server to the built-in hard disk of the host computer as files with arbitrary file names "PC-File". The
LIST-DELETE service deletes "Oxxxx" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data
Server.

Specifications of format 3
The following describes the specifications of list file format 3:
<1> This specification method applies when the file names of files to be processed are arbitrary file
names. In this case, file names on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server and on the
built-in hard disk of the host computer are assumed to be the same. Specify an arbitrary file name
enclosed with parentheses "(" and ")". The characters that can be used in arbitrary file names are the
following 66 ASCII characters only:
Numeric characters 0 to 9
Lowercase letters a to z
Uppercase letters A to Z
Four symbols (+, -, _, .)
<2> The LIST-GET service transfers files with arbitrary file names "Dtsvr-File" stored on the built-in
hard disk of the host computer to the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server with the file
names kept unchanged.
The LIST-PUT service transfers "Dtsvr-File" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast
Data Server to the built-in hard disk of the host computer with the file names "Dtsvr-File" kept
unchanged. The LIST-DELETE service deletes "Dtsvr-File" files stored on the built-in memory card
of the Fast Data Server.

Specifications of format 4
The following describes the specifications of list file format 4:
<1> This specification method applies when files to be processed have arbitrary file names. In this case,
file names on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server and file names on the built-in hard
disk of the host computer are assumed to be different. Specify a file name on the built-in memory
card of the Fast Data Server and a file name on the built-in hard disk of the host computer in
parentheses, separated by a comma ",".
The characters that can be used in file names on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server are
the following 66 ASCII characters only:
Numeric characters 0 to 9
Lowercase letters a to z
Uppercase letters A to Z
Four symbols (+, -, _, .)
The characters that can be used in arbitrary file names on the built-in hard disk of the host computer
depend on the OS of the host computer.
<2> The LIST-GET service transfers files with arbitrary file names "PC-File" stored on the built-in hard
disk of the host computer to the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server as "Dtsvr-File" files.
- 24 -
B-64014EN/06 SPECIFICATION 2.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS
The LIST-PUT service transfers "Dtsvr-File" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast
Data Server to files with file name "PC-File" on the built-in hard disk of the host computer.
The LIST-DELETE service deletes "Dtsvr-File" files stored on the built-in memory card of the Fast
Data Server.

Limitations on file names in a list file

The following limitations apply when file names are specified in a list file:
<1> The characters that can be used in file names on the built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server are
the following 66 ASCII characters only:
Numeric characters 0 to 9
Lowercase letters a to z
Uppercase letters A to Z
Four symbols (+, -, _, .)
The characters that can be used in arbitrary file names on the built-in hard disk of the host computer
depend on the OS of the host computer.
<2> Up to 255 characters can be used as an arbitrary file name on the built-in hard disk of the host
computer. However, the number of characters that can actually be used depends on the OS of the
host computer.

Storage locations of list files

The LIST-GET, LIST-PUT, and LIST-DELETE services are useful functions for managing NC programs
in groups.
The places where list files are prepared vary depending on the service to be executed.
For the LIST-GET service, NC programs to be operated on are present on the built-in hard disk of the
host computer, so list files are placed also on the built-in hard disk of the host computer.
For the LIST-PUT and LIST-DELETE services, NC programs to be operated on are present on the
built-in memory card of the Fast Data Server, so list files are also prepared on the built-in memory card of
the Fast Data Server.

2.7 DATASERVER Explorer CONNECTION

The following functions are added to FTP Server function of Data Server.
• Increase of FTP Server connections.
The number of FTP server connections can be increased from five to ten by this feature.
• Connection with Windows Explorer.
When you use the Windows Explorer as an FTP client software, you can make a new folder and
overwrite a file.
For the FTP client operation using the Explorer, see APPENDIX D.2, "OPERATION USING THE
Explorer."
• Addition of maintenance screen for FTP server.
You can monitor the state of FTP server. And you can disconnect the connection of FTP client
forcedly.
For the operation of the maintenance screen, see Section 2.5, "FTP SERVER MAINTENANCE" in
Part VI, "MAINTENANCE."

NOTE
1 To use the DataServer Explorer connection, the DataServer Explorer connection
option (R953) is required.
2 Some FTP client software programs may each internally use two or more FTP
clients. Note, therefore, that the number of FTP clients is not always equal to the
number of applications.

- 25 -
2.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/06

2.8 ISO CODE INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION

Use this function to input and output NC data between the CNC and Data Server and between the
personal computer and Data Server using the ISO code. Parity information is added to the ISO code
unlike the conventional ASCII code. This function checks this parity information, which improves the
reliability of data input/output.
While the most significant bit of the ASCII code is OFF, the most significant bit of the ISO code is used
as parity information so that the number of ON bits per character is even.

NOTE
1 NC data may not be able to be transferred correctly between the personal
computer and Data Server, depending on the FTP communication software on
the personal computer used.
2 If an ISO code parity error is detected in a comment part, no error is caused and
the relevant character is converted to a blank character.
3 When the ASCII code is selected as the input/output code, parity information is
not checked. The parity information in the most significant bit is removed and the
data is transferred as the ASCII code even if ISO code data is transferred.
4 To input and output data between the CNC and Data Server, a Data Server must
be selected as an I/O device. For details of the selection of an I/O device and
input/output code, see Section 2.2, "RELATED NC PARAMETERS" in Part III,
"SETTING".
5 Prepare NC data using the ISO code on the personal computer regardless of
which Data Server mode is selected.
For details of Data Server modes, see Section 2.2, "DATA SERVER MODES".
A tool (FANUC ISO Converter) is available for creating and checking NC data
using the ISO code on the personal computer. For details of this tool, refer to
Appendix in "OPERATOR'S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining
Center System) (B-64484EN)".
6 With the Series 30i/31i/32i-A, the ISO code input/output function cannot be used.

Input from a Data Server to the CNC

When the ISO code is selected as the input/output code and the CNC receives data from a Data Server,
the ISO code input/output function checks the ISO code for data validity.
If the function detects any character with wrong parity information, it terminates abnormally.

Target functions
(1) Program input
(2) M198-based subprogram call
(3) DNC operation

NOTE
1 On the CNC, the function checks the ISO code of received data regardless of
whether the file from the Data Server is a text or binary file.
For details of text and binary files, see Subsection 2.1.3, "Text Files and Binary
Files".
2 On the CNC, the function checks the ISO code of received data regardless of
which Data Server mode is selected.
For details of Data Server modes, see Section 2.2, "DATA SERVER MODES".

- 26 -
B-64014EN/06 SPECIFICATION 2.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS

Output from the CNC to a Data Server

When the ISO code is selected as the input/output code, the ISO code input/output function checks the
ISO code for data validity before data is stored on the memory card on the Data Server.
If the function detects any character with wrong parity information, it terminates abnormally.

Target functions
(1) Program output

NOTE
1 When the Data Server is in the FTP mode, data is output directly to the personal
computer, and the ISO code input/output function does not check the ISO code
on the Data Server. In this case, check the data on the personal computer
separately.
2 When multiple NC programs are output at a time or NC parameters are output,
they are output as binary files to the Data Server.
The ISO code input/output function does not check the ISO code in binary files
on the Data Server.

File transfer from the personal computer to the Data Server

When the ISO code is selected as the input/output code, the ISO code input/output function checks the
ISO code for data validity before data received from the personal computer is stored on the memory card
on the Data Server.
If the function detects any character with wrong parity information, it terminates abnormally.

Target functions
(1) GET (The Data Server operates as an FTP client.)
(2) PUT (The Data Server operates as an FTP server.)

NOTE
1 Prepare NC data using the ISO code on the personal computer.
2 When a binary file is transferred, the ISO code input/output function does not
check the ISO code before the file is stored on the memory card on the Data
Server.
3 During FTP transfer between the personal computer and Data Server, data
validity is checked as the FTP transfer protocol function.
The ISO code check can be enabled to check data redundantly.

File transfer from the Data Server to the personal computer

When the ISO code is selected as the input/output code, data is output using the ISO code from the
memory card on the Data Server.

Target functions
(1) PUT (The Data Server operates as an FTP client.)
(2) GET (The Data Server operates as an FTP server.)

- 27 -
2.DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/06

NOTE
1 Check the ISO code on the personal computer as required.
2 When a binary file is transferred, it is not converted to the ISO code on the Data
Server.
3 During FTP transfer between the personal computer and Data Server, data
validity is checked as the FTP transfer protocol function.
The ISO code check can be enabled to check data redundantly.

- 28 -
B-64014EN/06 SPECIFICATION 3.FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS

3 FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS
The FOCAS2/Ethernet functions can remotely control and monitor the CNC by using a personal
computer. For details, refer to the manual delivered with the FOCAS2 library software.

NOTE
1 In the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, the CNC operates as a server and waits for a
communication start request from a personal computer that operates as a client.
As communication with the personal computer starts, two sockets are used for
control and monitoring from the personal computer and for file transfer.
2 For the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, the machine tool builder or end user can
create desired software operated on each personal computer using the FOCAS2
library software.
Communication timing and other factors may vary depending on the personal
computer environment. Before starting communication, completely confirm that
there is no problem with the entire system including communication with the
personal computer.

- 29 -
4.DNS/DHCP CLIENT FUNCTIONS SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/06

4 DNS/DHCP CLIENT FUNCTIONS

If DNS/DHCP is used for communication setting of the Data Server functions and FOCAS2/Ethernet
functions, Ethernet addresses (IP address and subnet mask) can be set at a time on the host computer to
facilitate Ethernet address control.

DNS
With the DNS function, a fully qualified domain name (e.g., www.fanuc.co.jp) can be specified instead of
a hard-to-remember IP address just consisting of numbers (e.g., 192.168.0.10) when a TCP/IP
communication destination is to be specified.

NOTE
To use the DNS function, a personal computer having the DNS server function is
additionally required. See Chapter 4, "SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION,"
in Part III, "SETTING," and APPENDIX C, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP
DNS/DHCP."

DHCP
With the DHCP function, Ethernet addresses (IP address and subnet mask) that need to be set on the CNC
can be set on the host computer.

NOTE
To use the DHCP function, a personal computer having the DHCP server
function is additionally required. See Chapter 4, "SETTING THE DNS/DHCP
FUNCTION," in Part III, "SETTING," and Appendix C, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING
UP DNS/DHCP."

- 30 -
 5.MACHINE REMOTE
B-64014EN/06 SPECIFICATION DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS

5 MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS

FUNCTIONS
With the machine remote diagnosis functions, checking of the internal CNC status, ladder program
editing, and other operations can be performed as necessary by using a personal computer through a
LAN.
For details, refer to “Machine Remote Diagnosis Package OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-63734EN).”

- 31 -
6. UNSOLICITED MESSAGING
FUNCTION SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/06

6 UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION

With the unsolicited messaging function, the CNC transmits messages (CNC/PMC data) in an unsolicited
manner to application software on the personal computer according to a command from an NC program
or ladder program. By using this function, the need for application processing on the personal computer
to periodically inquire about the state of the CNC can be eliminated.

When the conventional function is used

Application software

Inquiry
Response Application checks for
CNC/PMC data changes.

When the unsolicited messaging function is used

NC program or ladder Application software
program アプリケーションソフトウェア

NC program or ladder
program checks for Application receives
Notification
CNC/PMC data notification from CNC.
changes.

NOTE
The unsolicited messaging function is a part of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.

Unsolicited messaging function execution procedure

The execution procedure for the unsolicited messaging function is described below.

1 Preparation on the personal computer

Create an application using the FOCAS2 function for the unsolicited messaging function and install
the unsolicited message server on a personal computer. For the method of creating an application
using the FOCAS2 function for the unsolicited messaging function and the method of installing the
unsolicited message server, refer to Chapter, "UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION", in
"FANUC Open CNC FOCAS1/FOCAS2 CNC/PMC Data Window Library Operator's Manual".

2 Preparation on the CNC

Create an NC program or ladder program for controlling unsolicited messaging.
For the method of creating an NC program or ladder program, see Section 6.2, "EXECUTING THE
UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION" in Part III, “OPERATION.”

3 Setting of the communication parameters for the unsolicited messaging function

To use the unsolicited messaging function, the following communication parameter settings are
needed:
(1) Setting for using the FOCAS2/Ethernet function
(2) Setting of the parameters for the unsolicited messaging function

- 32 -
 6.UNSOLICITED MESSAGING
B-64014EN/06 SPECIFICATION FUNCTION
For (2), a choice can be made from two modes of setting: CNC mode for setting on the CNC
screen and the PC mode for setting on the personal computer.
For the setting method of (1) and (2), see Section 6.1, "SETTING OF THE UNSOLICITED
MESSAGING FUNCTION” in Part III, “OPERATION.”

4 Starting the NC program or ladder program

Start the NC program or ladder program created in step 2, "Preparation on the CNC". At this time,
no unsolicited message is transmitted to the personal computer until step 5, "Starting the unsolicited
messaging function", is executed.
5 Starting the unsolicited messaging function
Execute the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstart on the personal computer. This execution places
the CNC in the state (named "Ready") where a transmission request from the NC program or ladder
program is awaited. Each time a transmission request is made from the NC program or ladder
program, an unsolicited message is automatically transmitted to the personal computer.
6 Ending the unsolicited messaging function
To end unsolicited message transmission, execute the FOCAS2 function cnc_unsolicstop on the
personal computer. This execution places the CNC in the state (named "Not Ready") where no
unsolicited message is transmitted even when a request for transmission is made from the NC
program or ladder program.

- 33 -
7. FTP FILE TRANSFER
FUNCTION SPECIFICATION B-64014EN/06

7 FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION

The FTP file transfer function is operated from the CNC to transfer a file. It works as an FTP client and
communicates with the FTP server on the host computer.

WARNING
To input or output data, the use of the ISO code input/output function is
recommended.
Parity information is not contained with data input/output using the ASCII code.
So, the use of the ASCII code is dangerous since any data corrupted during
input/output operation with the CNC is not detected.
If data corruption occurs, the machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly
causing damage to the tool, machine, and/or workpiece, or injury to the user.
For details of the ISO code input/output function, see Section 2.8, "ISO CODE
INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION".
With the Series 30i/31i/32i-A, the ISO code input/output function cannot be
used.

NOTE
1 Before communicating with the host computer using the FTP file transfer
function, completely confirm that there is no problem with the entire system
including communication with the personal computer because the personal
computer environment may affect communication operation.
2 To operate the host computer as the FTP server, FTP server software must be
operated on the host computer.

- 34 -
III. SETTING
 1.SETTING THE COMMUNICATION
B-64014EN/06 SETTING FUNCTION

1 SETTING THE COMMUNICATION

FUNCTION
This part describes the settings required to operate the following Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server functions:

• Data Server functions

• FOCAS2/Ethernet functions
• DNS/DHCP functions
• Machine remote diagnosis functions
• Unsolicited messaging function
• FTP file transfer function

Notes on using the functions for the first time

CAUTION
When setting the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server for the first time, carefully set
data such as an IP address and conduct a sufficient communication test,
consulting with your network administrator.
If data such as an IP address is not set correctly, a communication failure can
affect the entire network. Take sufficient care.
The load on the network may become greater than expected depending on the
performance of the personal computer. Before using the functions, completely
confirm that there is no problem with the entire system including communication
with the personal computer.

NOTE
When the 8-level data protection function is enabled, whether the communication
parameters can be set depends on the Ethernet function setting for the 8-level
data protection function.
In the Series 30i/31i/32i-A, the communication parameters are not processed by
the 8-level data protection function.

1.1 BACKING UP/RESTORING COMMUNICATION

PARAMETERS
This section explains how to back up communication parameters for Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server to the
I/O device and to restore them from the I/O device.
As an I/O device, the memory card or USB memory is available. To select an I/O device, use parameter
No. 20.

- 37 -
1. SETTING THE COMMUNICATION
FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/06

WARNING
When [RESTORE] is executed for communication parameters, the
communication parameters including the allocation of a PMC area to each
communication function are all restored. When [ALL RESTORE] is executed for
communication parameters, the communication parameters valid for embedded
Ethernet, Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server, PROFIBUS-DP master/slave,
DeviceNet master/slave, FL-net, CC-Link remote device, EtherNet/IP
scanner/adapter, Modbus/TCP server, and PROFINET IO device are all
restored. When the unsolicited messaging function is enabled, the allocation of
macro variables is also restored.
For this reason, immediately after executing [RESTORE] or [ALL RESTORE] for
communication parameters, fully understand instructions written in "GENERAL
WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT" in "SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS" at the beginning of this manual and carefully check the setting
of the communication parameters of the relevant communication functions
before starting operation.
For any communication function for which any PMC area or macro variable is
allocated, make sure that DI/DO data, status data (data for monitoring the
communication status), and macro variable operate correctly before starting
operation.
If operation is started without checking the above, the machine may behave
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the tool, machine, and/or workpiece,
or injury to the user.

CAUTION
While an external I/O device such as the memory card or USB memory is being
accessed, do not turn the power to the CNC off or remove the external I/O
device. Doing so may damage the external I/O device.

NOTE
1 Communication parameters can be backed up or restored only in the MDI mode,
EDIT mode, or emergency stop state.
2 When the 8-level data protection function is enabled, whether the communication
parameters can be backed up or restored depends on the Ethernet function
setting for the 8-level data protection function.
3 Communication parameters can be backed up or restored only using the
memory card or USB memory as the I/O device.
With the Series 30i/31i/32i-A, the USB memory cannot be used.

Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B or Power Motion i-A)
appears. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen.
4 Press the soft keys [COMMON] - [(OPRT)] and then [+]. The soft keys [BACKUP], [RESTORE],
[ALL BACKUP], and [ALL RESTORE] for backing up or restoring communication parameters
appear.
5 Press the soft key [BACKUP], [RESTORE], [ALL BACKUP], or [ALL RESTORE]. The soft keys
[EXECUTE] and [CANCEL] appear.

- 38 -
 1.SETTING THE COMMUNICATION
B-64014EN/06 SETTING FUNCTION
6 Enter the name of a file to be backed up or restored in the key-in buffer, and press the soft key
[EXECUTE]. The operation selected at the above step is executed.
The character string “EXECUTING” blinks during execution.

Operation
BACKUP
The communication parameters for Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server are saved from the SRAM of the CNC
main unit to the I/O device.
If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used when the communication
parameters are saved to the I/O device. If no file name is specified, the file name “ETHERBRD.MEM” is
used.

RESTORE
The communication parameters for Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server are read from the I/O device and saved
to the SRAM of the CNC main unit.
If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used when the communication
parameters are read from the I/O device. If no file name is specified, the file name “ETHERBRD.MEM”
is used.

ALL BACKUP
All valid communication parameters for embedded Ethernet, Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server,
PROFIBUS-DP master/slave, DeviceNet master/slave, FL-net, CC-Link remote device, EtherNet/IP
scanner / adapter, Modbus/TCP server, and PROFINET IO device are saved from the SRAM of the CNC
main unit to the I/O device.
If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used when the communication
parameters are saved to the I/O device. If no file name is specified, the file name “NETWORK.MEM” is
used.

- 39 -
1. SETTING THE COMMUNICATION
FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/06

ALL RESTORE
All valid communication parameters for embedded Ethernet, Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server,
PROFIBUS-DP master/slave, DeviceNet master/slave, FL-net, CC-Link remote device, EtherNet/IP
scanner / adapter, Modbus/TCP server, and PROFINET IO device are read from the I/O device and saved
to the SRAM of the CNC main unit.
However, if a communication function related to a valid communication parameter is disabled in the CNC,
that parameter is not saved to the SRAM.
If a file name is specified in the key-in buffer, the specified file name is used when the parameters are
read from the I/O device. If no file name is specified, the file name “NETWORK.MEM” is used.

NOTE
When communication parameters are restored, an alarm condition occurs that
requires power-off.

1.1.1 Related NC Parameters

0020 I/O CHANNEL: Input/output device selection, or interface number for a foreground input/output device

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 4: Selects the memory card as the input/output device.
17: Selects the USB memory as the input/output device.
It is not possible to backup and restore the communication parameters by using other
devices.

NOTE
In case of Series 30i/31i/32i-A, the memory card is used
regardless for this NC parameter.

- 40 -
 2.SETTING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/06 SETTING FUNCTIONS

2 SETTING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS

This chapter describes the communication setting for the Data Server functions.

Notes on using the Data Server functions

WARNING
1 To input or output data, the use of the ISO code input/output function is
recommended.
Parity information is not contained with data input/output using the ASCII code.
So, the use of the ASCII code is dangerous since any data corrupted during
input/output operation with the CNC is not detected.
During DNC operation using a Data Server, data input using the ASCII code is
also dangerous since parity information is not contained and any corrupted data
in a read program is not detected.
If data corruption occurs, the machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly
causing damage to the tool, machine, and/or workpiece, or injury to the user.
For details of the ISO code input/output function, see Section 2.8, "ISO CODE
INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION" in Part II, “SPECIFICATION”.
With the Series 30i/31i/32i-A, the ISO code input/output function cannot be
used.
2 The memory card used for a Data Server can be deteriorated by writing data too
many times. If a deteriorated memory card is used, the operation performance
may be affected because it takes time to read data, or the machine may behave
unexpectedly because correct data cannot be read, possibly causing damage to
the tool, machine, and/or workpiece, or injury to the user.
For this reason, avoid operation involved with frequent rewriting.

CAUTION
1 Operation cannot be guaranteed for any memory card that is not recommended
by FANUC.
Be sure to use a memory card recommended by FANUC.
2 When using the Fast Data Server for the first time, be sure to format the memory
card, set parameters, then turn the power off then back on. If an attempt is made
to use the Data Server functions without following these steps, normal operation
is not guaranteed.
3 Before performing FTP communication using the Fast Data Server for the first
time, consult with your network administrator, carefully set a network address
and other items, and conduct communication tests thoroughly. Any error in
settings such as a network address setting can lead to an adverse influence
such as a communication failure on the entire network.
Be very careful about any communication failure. If a Data Server is used on a
network involved with a communication failure, a communication failure
intermittently occurs in the Data Server, which may cause a CNC system error.
4 When the power to the CNC is turned off during access to the memory card, files
stored on the memory card may be destroyed. So, be careful not to turn off the
power to the CNC during access to the memory card.
5 In preparation for damage to the memory card, always take backup copies of the
files stored on the memory card to the host computer.
- 41 -
2. SETTING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/06

NOTE
1 With the Data Server functions (FTP client), a single CNC can connect only one
FTP server.
2 With the Data Server functions (FTP server), a single CNC can connect up to
five FTP clients. However, some FTP client software programs may each
internally use two or more FTP clients. Note, therefore, that the number of FTP
clients is not always equal to the number of applications.
If the DataServer Explorer connection is enabled, one CNC can connect up to
ten FTP clients.
For the DataServer Explorer connection, see Section 2.7, "DATASERVER
Explorer CONNECTION," in Part II, "SPECIFICATION."
3 The Data Server functions (FTP clients) of Series 30i/31i/32i-A do not support
passive mode (PASV command).
4 When many programs are registered in the memory card for the Data Server
functions, it may take time to display a file list or register a file.
5 When many files are registered in the host computer, it may take time to display
a file list on the DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen.
In this case, take action, such as dividing the directory containing registered
files.

2.1 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER SETTING SCREEN

This section describes the setting screen for operating the Data Server functions.

Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i-B) appears. (When there is no
soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen.
4 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [DATA SERVER] and then enter parameters for the items that
appear.

- 42 -
 2.SETTING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/06 SETTING FUNCTIONS

COMMON screen (BASIC)

Press soft key [COMMON] to display the COMMON screen (BASIC).

COMMON screen (BASIC)

Setting item
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the Fast Data Server.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.
(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.
Specify this item when the network contains a router.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")

Display item
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server MAC address

NOTE
The second page (detail screen) of the COMMON screen is to be set when the
DNS/DHCP function is used. For details, see Chapter 4, "SETTING THE
DNS/DHCP FUNCTION".

- 43 -
2. SETTING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/06

Data Server screens (CONNECT 1, CONNECT 2, CONNECT 3)

Press soft key [DATA SERVER] to display the Data Server screen.
By using page keys , the three host computers at connection destinations 1, 2, and 3 can be
set.

Data Server screens (for connection destination 1)

Setting item
Item Description
HOST NAME Specify the IP address of the host computer.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.200")
PORT NUMBER Specify the port number. Usually, set 21 because the FTP communication is used.
USER NAME Specify the name of the user to log on to the host computer using FTP. (A user
name of up to 31 characters can be specified.)
Be sure to set the user name.
PASSWORD Specify the password for the above user name.
The password must always be specified.
LOGIN FOLDER Specify a work folder to be used when the user logs in to the host computer. (Up to
127 characters can be specified.)
If no data is set, the home folder set on the host computer is used as a login folder.

Operation
Select a connection destination.

1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display soft key [HOST SELECT]. Then, press soft key [HOST
SELECT] to display soft keys [CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], and [CONECT 3].

- 44 -
 2.SETTING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/06 SETTING FUNCTIONS
2 Press one of soft keys [CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], and [CONECT 3] according to the host
computer to which you want to make a connection. The screen title of connection destination 1, 2 or
3 is displayed in reverse video. The screen title displayed in reverse video indicates the connection
destination host computer.

When connection destination 1 is selected

Data Server screens (FTP SERVER)

Press soft key [DATA SERVER] to display the Data Server screen.
By using page keys , the FTP server setting screen is displayed after the connection
destination 1, 2, or 3 screen.

Data Server screens (FTP SERVER)

Setting item
Item Description
USER NAME Specify a user name to be used when the host computer logs in to the Data Server.
(A user name of up to 31 characters can be specified.)
Be sure to set the user name.
PASSWORD Specify the password for the above user name.
The password must always be specified.
LOGIN FOLDER Specify a work folder to be used when the host computer logs in to the Data Server.
(Up to 127 characters can be specified.)
If no data is set, the home folder (home directory) is used as a login folder.

- 45 -
2. SETTING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/06

Data Server MODE screen (SETTING)

Press soft key [DS MODE] to display the Data Server MODE screen (SETTING). The current mode can
be checked and changed.

Data Server screen (SETTING)

Display item
Item Description
CHANNELS Displays the number of channels currently being used.
MODE Displays the currently set Data Server mode.
STORAGE MODE
FTP MODE
BUFFER MODE

Operation
The Data Server mode can be changed.

1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display soft keys [STRAGE MODE], [FTP MODE], and [BUFFER
MODE].

2 To change the mode to a desired mode, press the soft key of the desired mode.

NOTE
1 With the Series 30i/31i-A, to use the buffer mode, the buffer mode function
option (J728) is required.
2 With the Series 32i-A, the buffer mode cannot be used.

- 46 -
 2.SETTING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/06 SETTING FUNCTIONS

Data Server MODE screen (MAINTENANCE)

Press soft key [DS MODE] and press page keys to display maintenance information for each
channel.

Data Server MODE screen (MAINTENANCE)

Display item
Item Description
CHANNEL Interface number of the buffer used for transferring NC programs between the CNC
and Data Server.
For example, a channel is assigned to each path.
EMPTY COUNTER Used for maintenance.
This item indicates the number of cases where the buffer becomes empty while NC
programs are being transferred from the Data Server to the CNC.
TOTAL SIZE Used for maintenance.
This item indicates the total number of bytes transferred when an NC program is
transferred from the Data Server.
WRITE POINTER Used for maintenance.
READ POINTER This item indicates the buffer use status when NC programs are transferred from
the Data Server to the CNC.

- 47 -
2. SETTING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/06

Data Server FORMAT screen

Press soft key [DS FORMAT] to display the format screen of the memory card built into the Data Server.

Data Server FORMAT screen

Display item
Item Description
DEVICE NAME Indicates the storage media currently being used by the Data Server.
"ATA" or "NONE" is indicated.
ATA : A memory card is mounted.
None : No memory card is mounted.
FORMAT TYPE Indicates the format type of the memory card.
"CNC FILE" or "---" is displayed.
When "---" is displayed, check whether the memory card is mounted properly and is
formatted correctly.
CHECK DISK Indicates the check result.
When no check is made : “-----“
When the check result is normal : “OK”
When the check result is abnormal : “NG”

Procedure (CHECK DISK)

1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [CHECK DISK].

2 Press soft key [EXEC] to check the format of the memory card and display the check result.

CAUTION
If the check result is abnormal, determine the cause of trouble from an error
message displayed on the ETHERNET LOG screen and back up the files stored
on the memory card immediately. Then, try to reformat the memory card.

- 48 -
 2.SETTING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/06 SETTING FUNCTIONS

NOTE
1 An error occurs if other Data Server functions are operated when a check disk is
made.
2 Also when a program on the memory card of the Data Server is selected as a
main program, the check disk operation cannot be performed.

Procedure (CNC FORMAT)

1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [CNC FORMAT].

2 Press soft key [EXEC] to format the memory card built into the Fast Data Server.

CAUTION
1 Do not turn off the power to the CNC when the memory card is being formatted.
Otherwise, the memory card can be damaged.
2 When the memory card is formatted, all files held on the memory card are
erased.

NOTE
1 An error occurs if other Data Server functions are operated when the memory
card is formatted.
2 Also when a program on the memory card of the Data Server is selected as a
main program, the memory card cannot be formatted.

2.2 RELATED NC PARAMETERS

The NC parameters related to the Data Server functions are described below.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 TVC

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit path

#0 TVC When a file is transferred from the personal computer to the Data Server, a TV check is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.

NOTE
This parameter is valid only for text files.
For text files, see Subsection 3.1.3, "Text Files and Binary Files" in
Part II, "SPECIFICATION."

0020 I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 5 : Selects the Data Server as the input/output device.

- 49 -
2. SETTING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/06

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0100 NCR CRF CTV

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit

#1 CTV When a file is transferred from the personal computer to the Data Server, character
counting for the TV check in program comment parts is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
#2 CRF When a file is output from the Data Server to the personal computer, EOB (end of block)
is:
0: Set as specified by parameter NCR (bit 3 of parameter No. 100).
1: Set to "CR" "LF".
#3 NCR When a file is output from the Data Server to the personal computer, EOB (end of block)
is:
0: Set to "LF" "CR" "CR".
1: Set to "LF".

NOTE
This parameter is valid only for text files.
For text files, see Subsection 3.1.3, "Text Files and Binary Files" in
Part II, "SPECIFICATION."

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0904 LCH BWT

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 BWT If FTP communication is behind data supply during DNC operation in the buffer mode of
the Data Server:
0: An error is caused.
1: No error is caused and DNC operation continues after waiting the completion of
FTP communication.
#7 LCH In the LIST-GET service of the Data Server, when a list file specifies 1025 or more files:
0: A check for duplicated file names is performed.
1: A check for duplicated file names is not performed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0905 DSF PCH

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#1 PCH At the start of communication of the Data Server, FTP file transfer function, or machine
remote diagnosis functions, checking for the presence of the server using PING is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.

- 50 -
 2.SETTING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/06 SETTING FUNCTIONS

NOTE
Usually, set Performed (0).
When the presence of the server using PING is not checked by
setting 1, it may take several tens of seconds until an error is
recognized due to no server on the network.
For mainly security reasons, a personal computer may be set so
that it does not respond to the PING command. Set 1 when the
Data Server communicates with such a personal computer.

#3 DSF When an NC program is stored on the memory card of the Data Server:
0: The file name takes priority.
1: The program name in the NC program takes priority.

NOTE
This parameter is valid only when files on a personal computer are
registered as text files on the memory card on the Data Server by
CNC operation.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0906 FSP EXP SCM PSV OVW

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#2 OVW When the Data Server is operated as an FTP server, if a file having the same name as a
file to be transferred from the FTP client is already stored in the memory card of Data
Server:
0: An error is caused.
1: No error is caused and the existing file is overwritten.

NOTE
To use this parameter, the DataServer Explorer connection option
(R953) is required.

#3 PSV The FTP clients of the Data Server functions or FTP file transfer function operate in:
0: Active mode.
1: Passive mode.

NOTE
1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
2 This parameter is only available with the Series 30i/31i/32i-B.

#5 SCM As the mode for accessing the memory card on the Data Server:
0: The mode supported by the memory card that is automatically determined is used.
1: The conventional PIO mode 2 is used.

- 51 -
2. SETTING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/06

NOTE
1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
2 This parameter is only available with the Series 30i/31i/32i-B.

#6 EXP When the Data Server operates as an FTP server and an FTP client performs GET
operation of a text file in the binary mode, EOB (end of block) is:
0: Set as specified by bits 2 (CRF) and 3 (NCR) of parameter No. 100.
1: Set to "LF".

NOTE
1 Usually, set to 0
When this parameter is set to 0, if a specific FTP client such as
Windows Explorer attempts to get a text file, the text file may be
incorrect. When using such an FTP client, set this parameter to 1.
2 To any file obtained when this parameter is set to 1, no blank for a
TV check is added. The file may not be able to be input a CNC for
which a TV check is to be performed.

#7 FSP When the Data Server is operated as an FTP server and an NC program is stored on the
memory card on the Data Server:
0: The file name takes priority.
1: The program name in the NC program takes priority.

NOTE
This parameter is valid only when files on a personal computer are
registered as text files on the memory card on the Data Server by
personal computer operation.
When this parameter is set to ”1”, a file is registered with the
program name in the NC program even if a request is made to
rename and register the file on the personal computer.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0908 ISO

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit

#0 ISO When a Data Server is selected as an I/O device, data input/output is performed using
0: ASCII codes.
1: ISO codes.

NOTE
This parameter is only available with the Series 30i/31i/32i-B.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0909 HDS
[Input type] Parameter input
[Data type] Bit

- 52 -
 2.SETTING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/06 SETTING FUNCTIONS

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#0 HDS High-speed file search in the DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

NOTE
1 File search operation differs depending on the setting of this
parameter.
- When "0" is set, a file name starting with the search string is
searched for.
- When "1" is set, file names are searched for an exact match for
the search string. If no exact match is found, a file name starting
with the search string is searched for.
For example, assume that files ABCD, AAA, ABC, and BBB are
listed and the search string is "ABC". When "0" is set, "ABCD" is
found. When "1" is set, "ABC" is found.
2 When this parameter is set to "1", a file may not be able to be
searched for correctly in the DETAIL ON mode, depending on the
FTP server software used. In this case, perform a search in the
DETAIL OFF mode.

0921 Selects the host computer 1 OS.

0922 Selects the host computer 2 OS.
0923 Selects the host computer 3 OS.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 2
0: Windows95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP/Vista/7.
1: UNIX/VMS.
2: Linux.

NOTE
Some FTP server software may not depend on the OS. Therefore,
the valid file list may not be displayed by the above setting.

0924 FOCAS2/Ethernet function wait time setting

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
Specifies the wait time (in 1 ms units) for the FOCAS2/Ethernet service when it is used
together with the Data Server functions.
If 0 is specified, a wait time of 1 ms is assumed.

0929 Specifies the attribute of the file to be transferred in operating as an FTP server.

[Input type] Parameter input

- 53 -
2. SETTING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/06

[Data type] Word

[Valid data range] 0 to 2
Specifies whether to use the file attribute specified in the FTP TYPE command when the
Data Server operates as an FTP server.

No.929 Meaning
0 Uses the file attribute specified in the TYPE command from the FTP client.
1 Fixes the attribute to text.
2 Fixes the attribute to binary.

Maximum number of files that can be registered to the memory card of the Data Server and maximum
0930
size per file that can be registered

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0, 10 to 15
No.930 Maximum number of files Maximum size per file
0 2047 512MB
10 511 2048MB
11 1023 1024MB
12 2047 512MB
13 4095 256MB
14 8191 128MB
15 16383 64MB

NOTE
1 When the memory card is formatted after this parameter is set, the
maximum number of files and maximum size per file are changed.
2 Each folder is counted as one file.
3 This parameter is valid when the series and edition of the Data
Server function software are edition 11 or later of series 6569.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3107 SOR

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit path

#4 SOR In the Data Server FILE LIST screen, files are displayed:
0: In the order of zero-suppressed program number.
1: In the order of program name.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3233 PDM

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#1 PDM When the Data Server FILE LIST screen is displayed:

0: The setting of an M198 operation folder/DNC operation file is enabled.
1: The setting of a foreground/background folder is enabled.

- 54 -
 2.SETTING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/06 SETTING FUNCTIONS

NOTE
When an M198 external subprogram call or DNC operation is
performed on the Data Server, set this bit to 0.
For the foreground and background folders, refer to Chapter,
"PROGRAM MANAGEMENT" in the OPERATOR’S MANUAL of
the CNC.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11374 PCB PCP

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#3 PCP To copy or move programs in the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen,
0: The conventional procedure is used.
1: The PC-like procedure is used.

NOTE
1 This parameter is only available with the Series 30i/31i/32i-A.
2 To use this parameter, the machining program/execution command
dual display option (R718) is required.

#4 PCB To copy or move programs in the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen,
0: The new procedure is used. (Personal computer-equivalent operation)
1: The old procedure is used.

NOTE
This parameter is only available with the Series 30i/31i/32i-B.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
24309 DUC

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#1 DUC Between the Data Server and USB memory,

0: Only data can be copied.
1: Data and programs can be copied.

WARNING
When a file containing multiple programs is copied from the USB
memory to the Data Server, the file is not divided into the programs
and the programs are not registered individually on the Data
Server. The programs are registered as one series of programs. Be
sure to copy a file containing one program. Operating the machine
after copying a file containing multiple programs is dangerous
because the machine may behave unexpectedly.

NOTE
This parameter is only available with the Series 30i/31i/32i-B.

- 55 -
2. SETTING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/06

2.3 EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS

An example of setting for operating the Data Server functions is given below. In this example of setting,
one personal computer is connected to two CNCs through a Data Server.

HUB

100BASE-TX (or 10BASE-T)

CNC 1 CNC 2 PC 1

CNC 1 CNC 2
IP ADDRESS 192.168.0.100 192.168.0.101
The common setting screen is
SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 used for setting.
ROUTER IP ADDRESS None None
CONNECT 1 PORT NUMBER 21 21
IP ADDRESS 192.168.0.200 192.168.0.200
USER NAME user user The Data Server setting screen
is used for setting.
PASSWORD user user
LOGIN FOLDER None None The Data Server mode setting
DATA SERVER MODE Storage Storage screen is used for setting.

Parameter NO. 20 5 5
NC parameter setting

PC 1 "Microsoft TCP/IP property" of the personal computer

IP address 192.168.0.200 (Windows2000/WindowsXP) is used for setting.
Sub-net mask 255.255.255.0
Default gateway None "User account” of the personal computer
User name user (Windows2000/WindowsXP) is used for setting.
Password user
Home folder default "Internet service manager" of the personal computer
(Windows2000/WindowsXP) is used for setting.

- 56 -
 3.SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet
B-64014EN/06 SETTING FUNCTIONS

3 SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet

FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the setting of parameters for the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions and CNC screen
display functions.

WARNING
Before using the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, fully understand the instructions
written in "GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT"
in "SAFETY PRECAUTIONS" at the beginning of this manual.
If you start operation before fully understanding them, the machine may behave
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the tool, machine, and/or workpiece,
or injury to the user.

CAUTION
Before performing communication using the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions for the
first time, consult with your network administrator, carefully set a network
address and other items, and conduct communication tests thoroughly. Any error
in settings such as a network address setting can lead to an adverse influence
such as a communication failure on the entire network.
Be very careful about any communication failure. If the FOCAS2/Ethernet
functions are used on a network involved with a communication failure, a
communication failure intermittently occurs in FOCAS2/Ethernet, which may
cause a CNC system error.

Note on using the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions

NOTE
With the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, up to 20 FOCAS2/Ethernet clients can be
connected to one CNC.

Note on using the CNC screen display functions

NOTE
With the CNC screen display functions, up to 1 CNC screen display function
client can be connected to one CNC.

3.1 OPERATING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet SETTING SCREEN

This section describes the setting screen for operating the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions and CNC screen
display functions.

Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B or Power Motion i-A)
appears. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen.
- 57 -
3. SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet
FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/06

4 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FOCAS2] and then enter parameters for the items that appear.

COMMON screen (BASIC)

Press soft key [COMMON] to display the COMMON screen (BASIC).

COMMON screen (BASIC)

Setting item
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the Fast Ethernet/ Fast Data Server.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.
(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.
Specify this item when the network contains a router.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")

Display item
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Fast Ethernet/ Fast Data Server MAC address

NOTE
The second page (detail screen) of the COMMON screen is to be set when the
DNS/DHCP function is used. For details, see Chapter 4, "SETTING THE
DNS/DHCP FUNCTION" provided later.

- 58 -
 3.SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet
B-64014EN/06 SETTING FUNCTIONS

FOCAS2 screen
Press soft key [FOCAS2] to display the FOCAS2 screen.

FOCAS2 screen

Setting item
Item Description
PORT NUMBER (TCP) Specifies the port No. to be used by the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions and CNC
screen display functions, within a range of 5001 to 65535.
PORT NUMBER (UDP) Set 0.
TIME INTERVAL Set 0.

3.2 RELATED NC PARAMETERS

0020 I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 6 : Selects the FOCAS2/Ethernet as the input/output device. This parameter is required
only for DNC operation, however.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0905 DNE

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#0 DNE During DNC operation using the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions, the termination of DNC
operation is:
0: Waited.
1: Not waited. (FOCAS2/HSSB compatible specification)

- 59 -
3. SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet
FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/06

0924 FOCAS2/Ethernet waiting time setting

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] msec
[Valid data range] 0 to 32767
When the FOCAS2/Ethernet and Data Server functions are used simultaneously, this
parameter sets the FOCAS2/Ethernet function waiting time in milliseconds.
When a value of 0 is set, the functions operate with assuming that 1 millisecond is
specified.

3.3 EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet

FUNCTIONS
An example of setting for operating the FOCAS2/Ethernet functions is given below. In this example of
setting, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs through a FOCAS2/Ethernet.

HUB

100BASE-TX (or 10BASE-T)

CNC 1 CNC 2 PC 1

CNC 1 CNC 2
IP ADDRESS 192.168.0.100 192.168.0.101
The common setting screen is used for
SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 setting.
ROUTER IP ADDRESS None None
PORT NUMBER (TCP) 8193 8193 The FOCAS2 setting screen is used for
PORT NUMBER (UDP) 0 0 setting.
TIME INTERVAL 0 0

PC 1
IP address 192.168.0.200
"Microsoft TCP/IP property" of the personal
Sub-net mask 255.255.255.0 computer (Windows 95/98/NT/2000/XP) is
used for setting.
Default gateway None
NC IP address 192.168.0.100
CNC 1 Specify these items with the arguments of
NC TCP port number 8193
the data window library function
NC IP address 192.168.0.101 "cnc_allclibhnd13."
CNC 2
NC TCP port number 8193

- 60 -
 4.SETTING THE DNS/DHCP
B-64014EN/06 SETTING FUNCTION

4 SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION

This chapter describes the setting of the DNS/DHCP function.

4.1 SETTING OF DNS

This section describes the setting procedure for operating DNS client function.

Procedure
1 Enable the DNS client function according to Section 4.3, "RELATED NC PARAMETERS"
provided later.
2 Set up the DNS server on the host computer. For information about setup, see Appendix C,
"EXAMPLE OF DNS/DHCP SETUP."
3 Make a connection to the host computer where the DNS server operates (hereinafter referred to as
the "DNS server") and restart the CNC, then press the function key .
4 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B or Power Motion
i-A), then press [COMMON] to display the COMMON (DETAIL) screen.
5 As the DNS IP address, enter the IP address of the DNS server.

COMMON screen (DETAIL)

Press soft key [COMMON] then page keys to display the COMMON (DETAIL) screen. Set
the setting items for DNS IP addresses.

COMMON screen (DETAIL)

Setting item
Item Description
DNS IP ADDRESS 1, 2 Up to two DNS server IP addresses can be set.
The CNC searches for a DNS server in the order from DNS IP address 1 to 2.

- 61 -
4.SETTING THE DNS/DHCP
FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/06

4.2 SETTING OF DHCP

This section describes the setting procedure for operating DHCP client function.

Procedure
1 Enable the DHCP client function according to Section 4.3 "RELATED NC PARAMETERS"
provided later.
2 Set up the DHCP server on the host computer. For information about setup, see Appendix C,
"EXAMPLE OF DNS/DHCP SETUP."
3 Make a connection to the host computer where the DHCP server operates (hereinafter referred to as
the "DHCP server") and restart the CNC, then press the function key .
4 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B or Power Motion
i-A), then press [COMMON] to display the COMMON screen.
5 If the DHCP client function of the CNC is enabled and a connection is made successfully with the
DHCP server, the following items are set automatically from the DHCP server:
- IP ADDRESS
- SUBNET MASK
- ROUTER IP ADDRESS
- DNS IP ADDRESS
- DOMAIN
If an attempt to make a connection with the DHCP server fails, "DHCP ERROR" is indicated in each
item.
6 Moreover, if the DNS client function is enabled at the same time and the DHCP server interacts with
the DNS server (the DNS server supports dynamic DNS), enter a desired host name.

COMMON screens (BASIC, DETAIL)

Press soft key [COMMON] then page keys to display the COMMON screens (BASIC and
DETAIL). If a connection is made successfully with the DHCP server and setting data is acquired, the
following is displayed:

When a connection with the DHCP server has been made successfully

If no host name is set, the CNC automatically sets a host name in the format "NC-<MAC address>".
- 62 -
 4.SETTING THE DNS/DHCP
B-64014EN/06 SETTING FUNCTION

Example of host name automatically set

If an attempt to make a connection with the DHCP server fails, the following is displayed:

When an attempt to make a connection with the DHCP server has failed

Check item
Item Description
IP ADDRESS If a connection is made successfully with the DHCP server, data acquired from the
SUBNET MASK DHCP server is displayed.
ROUTER IP ADDRESS If an attempt to make a connection with the DHCP server fails, "DHCP ERROR" is
DNS IP ADDRESS 1, 2 displayed.
DOMAIN

Setting item
Item Description
HOST NAME Enter a desired CNC host name.
If the DHCP server interacts with the DNS server, this host name is posted to the
DNS server.

If no host name is set, "NC-<MAC address>" is automatically set.

Example of host name automatically set:
NC-00E0E4004CF9

Display item
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server MAC address

- 63 -
4.SETTING THE DNS/DHCP
FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/06

4.3 RELATED NC PARAMETERS

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0904 DHCP DNS

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#5 DNS The DNS client function is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.
#6 DHC The DHCP client function is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.

NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

4.4 EXAMPLE OF SETTING DNS/DHCP

NOTE
This section provides examples of setting for Windows 2000 Server which
supports dynamic DNS.

4.4.1 When DNS/DHCP is Used with the Data Server

When a connection is made with the FTP server of the host computer (hereinafter referred to as the "FTP
server") by using the Data Server function, the IP address of the CNC can be set from the DHCP server
by enabling the DHCP client function of the CNC.
Moreover, by enabling the DNS client function of the CNC, an FTP server can be specified with a host
name instead of an IP address.

Example of specifying a connection destination with a host name (FTPServer-1)

- 64 -
 4.SETTING THE DNS/DHCP
B-64014EN/06 SETTING FUNCTION

Setting the DNS server / DHCP server

Setting the DHCP server
In the database of the DHCP server, set the following items:
• Range of IP addresses to be managed by the DHCP server
• Subnet mask to be managed by the DHCP server
• IP address for DNS server
• Domain
The DHCP server enables the function for updating the database of the DNS server.
For DHCP server setting, see Section C.1, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DHCP SERVER OF Windows
2000 Server" in Appendix C, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP."

Setting the DNS server

The DNS server allows the DHCP server to update the database of the DNS server.
For DNS server setting, see Section C.2, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS SERVER OF Windows
2000 Server" in Appendix C, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP."

Setting the FTP server

For FTP server setting, see Appendix B, "EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP."

Setting the CNC

Parameter
To enable the DNS client function, set bit 5 of parameter No. 904 to 1.
To enable the DHCP client function, set bit 6 of parameter No. 904 to 1.

4.4.2 When DHCP is Used with the FTP Server Function of the Data
Server
The Data Server (FTP server function) can be accessed by specifying a host name from an FTP client
where an FTP client operates (hereinafter referred to as an "FTP client"), using the interaction between
the DHCP server and DNS server operating with Windows 2000 Server.
The DHCP client function of the CNC is enabled.

Flow of operation
When the system is initialized or the system configuration is modified
1 A host name is set on the CNC.
2 When the power is turned on, the Data Server posts the host name to the DHCP server.
3 The DHCP server assigns an IP address, and the table of correspondence between CNC host names
and CNC IP addresses is updated.

When operation is performed from an FTP client

1 An FTP client inquires of the DNS server about the IP address of a CNC.
2 The FTP client acquires the IP address of the CNC.
3 The FTP client communicates with the FTP server of the CNC by using the IP address of the CNC.

- 65 -
4.SETTING THE DNS/DHCP
FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/06

FTP client
(4) Inquires about the IP
address of CNC-1.
Windows 2000 Server
The FTP client DHCP server /DNS server
specifies a CNC
by its name
(CNC-1) instead
(5) Returns the IP address.
of its IP address.

(6) Performs communication.

(1) Sets the name.

(2) Posts CNC-1 at

power-on time.
CNC-1

(3) Assigns an IP address to CNC-1.

Setting the DNS server/DHCP server

Setting the DHCP server
In the database of the DHCP server, set the following items:
• Range of IP addresses to be managed by the DHCP server
• Subnet mask to be managed by the DHCP server
• IP address for DNS server
• Domain
The DHCP server enables the function for updating the database of the DNS server.
For DHCP server setting, see Section C.1, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DHCP SERVER OF Windows
2000 Server" in Appendix C, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP."

Setting the DNS server

The DNS server allows the DHCP server to update the database of the DNS server.
For DNS server setting, see Section C.2, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS SERVER OF Windows
2000 Server" in Appendix C, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP."

Setting the CNC

Parameter
To enable the DHCP client function, set bit 6 of parameter No. 904 to 1.
As a host name, set a desired name. Otherwise, a name automatically set by the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data
Server is used.

4.4.3 When DHCP is Used with the FOCAS2/Ethernet Function

Ethernet parameters can be set with no setting performed from the CNC, using the interaction between the
DHCP server and DNS server operating with Windows 2000 Server.
The DHCP client function of the CNC is enabled.

Flow of operation
When the system is initialized or the system configuration is modified
1 A host name is set on the CNC.
2 When the power is turned on, the CNC posts the host name to the DHCP server.
3 The DHCP server assigns an IP address, and the table of correspondence between CNC host names
and CNC IP addresses is updated.

- 66 -
 4.SETTING THE DNS/DHCP
B-64014EN/06 SETTING FUNCTION

When FOCAS2/Ethernet application software is executed

1 The user's application inquires of the DNS server about the IP address of a CNC.
2 The user's application acquires the IP address of the CNC.
3 The user's application communicates with the CNC by using the IP address of the CNC.

User's application software

(FOCAS2/Ethernet) (4) Inquires about the IP
address of CNC-1. Windows 2000 Server
The application software DHCP server / DNS server
specifies a CNC by its
name (CNC-1) instead of
its IP address. (5) Returns the IP address.

(6) Performs
(1) Sets the name. communication.

(2) Posts CNC-1 at

power-on time.
CNC-1

(3) Assigns an IP address to CNC-1.

Setting the DNS server/DHCP server

Setting the DHCP server
In the database of the DHCP server, set the following items:
• Range of IP addresses to be managed by the DHCP server
• Subnet mask to be managed by the DHCP server
• IP address for DNS server
• Domain
The DHCP server enables the function for updating the database of the DNS server.
For DHCP server setting, see Section C.1, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DHCP SERVER OF Windows
2000 Server" in Appendix C, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP."

Setting the DNS server

The DNS server allows the DHCP server to update the database of the DNS server.
For DNS server setting, see Section C.2, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS SERVER OF Windows
2000 Server" in Appendix C, "EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP."

Setting the CNC

Parameter
To enable the DHCP client function, set bit 6 of parameter No. 904 to 1.
As a host name, set a desired name. Otherwise, a name automatically set by the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data
Server is used.
When the DHCP function is enabled, the FOCAS2/Ethernet-related parameters are automatically set if bit
3 of parameter No. 904 is set to 0. If bit 3 of parameter No. 904 is set to 1, the parameters for i CELL
communication are automatically set.

- 67 -
5. SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/06

5 SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE

DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes the setting of parameters for the machine remote diagnosis functions.
For explanation of the entire machine remote diagnosis functions, refer to "Machine Remote Diagnosis
Package OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-63734EN)."

5.1 OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS

SETTING SCREEN
This section describes the setting screen for operating the machine remote diagnosis functions.

Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B or Power Motion i-A)
appears. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen.
4 Press soft keys [COMMON], [FOCAS2], and [REMOTE DIAG] and then enter parameters for the
items that appear.

COMMON screen (BASIC)

Press soft key [COMMON] to display the COMMON screen (BASIC).

COMMON screen (BASIC)

Setting item
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.
(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
- 68 -
 5.SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE
B-64014EN/06 SETTING DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS

Item Description
ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.
Specify this item when the network contains a router.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")

Display item
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Fast Ethernet / Fast Data Server MAC address

NOTE
The second page (detail screen) of the COMMON screen is to be set when the
DNS/DHCP function is used. For details, see Chapter 4 "SETTING THE
DNS/DHCP FUNCTION".

COMMON screen (DETAIL)

Press soft key [COMMON] then page keys to display the COMMON (DETAIL) screen. Set
the setting items for DNS IP addresses.

COMMON screen (DETAIL)

Setting item
Item Description
DNS IP ADDRESS 1, 2 Up to two DNS server IP addresses can be set.
The CNC searches for a DNS server in the order from DNS IP address 1 to 2.

- 69 -
5. SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/06

FOCAS2 screen
Press soft key [FOCAS2] to display the FOCAS2 screen.

FOCAS2 screen

Setting item
Item Description
PORT NUMBER (TCP) Specifies the port No. to be used by the machine remote diagnosis functions
(FOCAS2/Ethernet functions), within a range of 5001 to 65535.
PORT NUMBER (UDP) Set 0.
TIME INTERVAL Set 0.

MACHINE REMOTE DIAG screen (COMMON)

Press soft key [REMOTE DIAG] to display the MACHINE REMOTE DIAG screen (COMMON).

Machine remote diagnosis screen (BASIC)

- 70 -
 5.SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE
B-64014EN/06 SETTING DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS

Setting item
Item Description
MTB ID This information is required by the machine remote diagnosis package to confirm that
the diagnosis request is issued from a machine manufactured by the machine tool
builder. The MTB identification information on the diagnosis accepting server of the
machine remote diagnosis package can be set to accept diagnosis requests only from
the machines manufactured by the machine tool builder.
(Example of specification format: "FANUC")
MACHINE ID Information required by the machine remote diagnosis package to identify the machine
under diagnosis
(Example of specification format: "217xxx-1011xxxxx")

MACHINE REMOTE DIAG screen (INQUIRY1, INQUIRY2, INQUIRY3)

Press soft key [REMOTE DIAG] to display the MACHINE REMOTE DIAG screen.
By using page keys , the three host computers at inquiry destinations 1, 2, and 3 can be set.

MACHINE REMOTE DIAG screens (INQUIRY1):

Screen when the DNS function is disabled (left) and screen when the function is enabled (right)

Setting item
Item Description
HOST NAME Specify the IP address of the host computer (machine remote diagnosis accepting
server) when the DNS function is disabled.
(Example of specification format: "200.201.202.203")
Specify the host name of the host computer (machine remote diagnosis accepting
server) when the DNS function is enabled. (You can specify up to 63 characters.)
(Example of specification format: "RMTDIAG.FANUC.CO.JP")
PORT NUMBER Specify a port number. Usually, specify "8194" because the machine remote diagnosis
functions are used.
INQUIRY NAME Specify information for identifying the host computer (machine remote diagnosis
accepting server). (You can specify up to 63 characters.)
(Example of specification format: "FANUC LTD.")

- 71 -
5. SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/06

5.2 RELATED NC PARAMETERS

0024 Setting of communication with the PMC ladder development tool

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 10: The high-speed interface (Ethernet) is used for PMC online editing.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0904 DNS

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#5 DNS The DNS function is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.

NOTE
1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
2 To use the DNS function, set DNS IP ADDRESS 1 and DNS IP
ADDRESS 2 on the COMMON (DETAIL) screen.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0905 PCH

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#1 PCH At the start of communication of the Data Server, FTP file transfer function, or machine
remote diagnosis functions, checking for the presence of the server using PING is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.

NOTE
Usually, set Performed (0).
When the presence of the server using PING is not checked by
setting 1, it may take several tens of seconds until an error is
recognized due to no server on the network.
For mainly security reasons, a personal computer may be set so
that it does not respond to the PING command. Set 1 when the
Data Server communicates with such a personal computer.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8706 MRD

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

- 72 -
 5.SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE
B-64014EN/06 SETTING DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS

#6 MRD Type of communication device to be used by the machine remote diagnosis function:
0: The machine remote diagnosis function is not used.
1: The Fast Ethernet board is used.

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

5.3 CONTROLLING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS

FUNCTIONS FROM THE PMC
You can use signals from the PMC to control the start and forced termination of the machine remote
diagnosis functions and post the status of the machine remote diagnosis functions and error numbers to
the PMC ladder.

WARNING
Before controlling the machine remote diagnosis functions from the PMC, fully
understand the instructions written in "GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC
APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT" in "SAFETY PRECAUTIONS" at the beginning
of this manual.
If operation is started without checking the above, the machine may behave
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the tool, machine, and/or workpiece,
or injury to the user.

5.3.1 Signals
No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0141 DIAREQ DIASTP INQU2 INQU1 INQU0

DIAREQ <G0141.5>
[Name] Signal to request machine remote diagnosis
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Requests the start of machine remote diagnosis.
[Operation] When this signal is set to "1", it requests the start of machine remote diagnosis to the
inquiry destination according to the signals indicating the number of the inquiry
destination (INQU0 to INQU2). When the acceptance completion signal (RMTEND) or
acceptance reject signal (RMTCAN) is set to "1", this signal is set to "0".

DIASTP <G0141.4>
[Name] Signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Requests the forced termination of machine remote diagnosis.
[Operation] When this signal is set to "1", it requests forced termination to the machine remote
diagnosis accepting server. When the completion signal for machine remote signal cancel
acceptance (RMTCLS) is set to "1", this signal is set to "0".

INQU2 <G0141.2>
INQU1 <G0141.1>
INQU0 <G0141.0>
[Name] Inquiry number select signals
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Inquiry destination for which to start machine remote diagnosis
- 73 -
5. SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/06

[Operation] Select an item from the table below as an inquiry destination for which to start machine
remote signal.

INQU2 INQU1 INQU0 Status

0 0 0 No selection
0 0 1 Inquiry destination 1
0 1 0 Inquiry destination 2
0 1 1 Inquiry destination 3

No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0082 RMTCLS

RMTCLS <F0082.3>
[Name] Completion signal for machine remote diagnosis cancel acceptance
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies that a request to cancel machine remote diagnosis has been accepted.
[Output condition] When machine remote diagnosis is canceled after the signal to request machine remote
diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP) is set to "1", this signal is set to "1". When the signal to
request machine remote diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP) is set to "0", this signal is set to
"0".

No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0083 RMTCAN RMTEND DIAST5 DIAST4 DIAST3 DIAST2 DIAST1 DIAST0

RMTCAN <F0083.7>
[Name] Reject signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies that a machine remote diagnosis request has been rejected.
[Output condition] When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1", a request to
start machine remote diagnosis is issued to the machine remote diagnosis accepting server.
When the server rejects the request, this signal is set to "1". When the signal to request
machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0", this signal is set to "0".

RMTEND <F0083.6>
[Name] Completion signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Notifies that a machine remote diagnosis request has been accepted by the machine
remote diagnosis accepting server.
[Output condition] When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1", a request to
start machine remote diagnosis is issued to the machine remote diagnosis accepting server.
When the server accepts the request, this signal is set to "1". When the signal to request
machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0", this signal is set to "0".

- 74 -
 5.SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE
B-64014EN/06 SETTING DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS

DIAST5 <F0083.5>
DIAST4 <F0083.4>
DIAST3 <F0083.3>
DIAST2 <F0083.2>
DIAST1 <F0083.1>
DIAST0 <F0083.0>
[Name] Notification signals for the machine remote diagnosis status
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Report the status of machine remote diagnosis.
[Output condition] The status of machine remote diagnosis is reported as listed in the following table.

DIAST5 DIAST4 DIAST3 DIAST2 DIAST1 DIAST0 Description

0 0 0 0 0 0 No status
0 0 0 0 0 1 OPEN
0 0 0 0 1 0 OPENING
0 0 0 0 1 1 ACCEPTED
0 0 0 1 0 0 REFUSED
0 0 0 1 0 1 DIAGNOSING
0 0 0 1 1 0 DIAGNOSING
0 0 0 1 1 1 CLOSE
0 0 1 0 0 0 FORCE CLOSING
0 0 1 0 0 1 ERROR

No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F0088 DIAER7 DIAER6 DIAER5 DIAER4 DIAER3 DIAER2 DIAER1 DIAER0

DIAER7 <F0088.7>
DIAER6 <F0088.6>
DIAER5 <F0088.5>
DIAER4 <F0088.4>
DIAER3 <F0088.3>
DIAER2 <F0088.2>
DIAER1 <F0088.1>
DIAER0 <F0088.0>
[Name] Notification signals for a machine remote diagnosis error number
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Report an error number of machine remote diagnosis.
[Output condition] These signals indicate an error number of machine remote diagnosis. The error number is
0 to 255 in binary format.

5.3.2 Signal Timing Charts

This section describes control of the start and forced termination of machine remote diagnosis according
to the signals from the PMC using timing charts.

- 75 -
5. SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/06

5.3.2.1 When the start of machine remote diagnosis is accepted

INQU0 (G0141.0)

INQU1 (G0141.1)

INQU2 (G0141.2)
<1>

DIAREQ (G0141.5) <4>

<2>
RMTEND (F0083.6) <3> <5>

The start of machine remote

diagnosis is accepted.

<1> Before the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1", an inquiry
destination for which to start the remote diagnosis functions is selected using the inquiry destination
number signals (INQU0, INQU1, and INQU2). In this example, "inquiry destination 3" is selected
by setting INQU0 = 1, INQU1 = 1, and INQU2 = 0.
<2> The signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1".
<3> When the machine remote diagnosis package accepts the request to start diagnosis, the completion
signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTEND) is set to "1".
<4> When the completion signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTEND) is set to "1", the
signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0".
<5> When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0", the completion signal
for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTEND) is set to "0".

5.3.2.2 When the start of machine remote diagnosis is rejected

INQU0 (G0141.0)

INQU1 (G0141.1)

INQU2 (G0141.2)
<1>

DIAREQ (G0141.5) <4>

<2>
RMTCAN (F0083.7) <3> <5>

The start of machine remote

diagnosis is rejected.

<1> Before the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1", an inquiry
destination for which to start the remote diagnosis functions is selected using the inquiry destination
number signals (INQU0, INQU1, and INQU2). In this example, "inquiry destination 3" is selected
by setting INQU0 = 1, INQU1 = 1, and INQU2 = 0.
<2> The signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "1".
<3> When the machine remote diagnosis package rejects the request to start diagnosis, the reject signal
for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTCAN) is set to "1".
<4> When the reject signal for machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTCAN) is set to "1", the signal
to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0".

- 76 -
 5.SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE
B-64014EN/06 SETTING DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
<5> When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis (DIAREQ) is set to "0", the reject signal for
machine remote diagnosis acceptance (RMTCAN) is set to "0".

5.3.2.3 When machine remote diagnosis is forcibly terminated

DIASTP (G0141.4) <2>

RMTCLS (F0082.3) <1> <3>

Machine remote diagnosis is
forcibly terminated.

<1> When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP) is set to "1", the
completion signal for machine remote diagnosis cancel acceptance (RMTCLS) is set to "1".
<2> When the completion signal for machine remote diagnosis cancel acceptance (RMTCLS) is set to
"1", the signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP) is set to "0".
<3> When the signal to request machine remote diagnosis cancellation (DIASTP) is set to "0", the
completion signal for machine remote diagnosis cancel acceptance (RMTCLS) is set to "0" and the
machine remote diagnosis functions are forcibly terminated.

5.4 EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE

DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
An example of setting for operating the machine remote diagnosis functions is given below. In this
example of setting, one personal computer functions as the machine remote diagnosis accepting server
and machine remote diagnosis client and is connected to one CNC.

HUB

100BASE-TX (or 10BASE-T)

CNC 1 PC 1

CNC 1
IP ADDRESS 192.168.0.100
SUBNET MASK 255.255.255.0 The common setting screen is used for
setting.
ROUTER IP ADDRESS None
PORT NUMBER (TCP) 8193
The FOCAS2 setting screen is used for
PORT NUMBER (UDP) 0
setting.
TIME INTERVAL 0
MTB ID FANUC
MACHINE ID 217XXX-101XXXXX The machine remote diagnosis screen is
INQUIRY 1 : HOST NAME 192.168.0.200 used for setting.
INQUIRY 1 : PORT NUMBER 8194

- 77 -
5. SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS SETTING B-64014EN/06

PC 1 "Microsoft TCP/IP property" of the

IP address 192.168.0.200 personal computer (Windows
Sub-net mask 255.255.255.0 95/98/NT/2000/XP) is used for setting.
Default gateway None
Accepting server : PORT NUMBER 8194 "Diagnosis accepting server setting" of the
Proxy server : PORT NUMBER 8193 machine remote diagnosis package is
Accepts all diagnosis used for setting.
MTB ID
requests.

- 78 -
 6.SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
B-64014EN/06 SETTING MESSAGING FUNCTION

6 SETTING THE UNSOLICITED

MESSAGING FUNCTION
This chapter describes the setting of parameters for the Unsolicited Messaging function.

6.1 SETTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION

This section describes the setting screen for operating the Unsolicited Messaging function.

Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B or Power Motion i-A)
appears. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen.
4 Press soft keys [COMMON], [FOCAS2], and [UNSOLI MSG] and then enter parameters for the
items that appear.

COMMON screen (BASIC)

Press soft key [COMMON] to display the COMMON screen (BASIC).

COMMON screen (BASIC)

Setting item
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.
(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.
Specify this item when the network contains a router.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")

- 79 -
6. SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
MESSAGING FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/06

Display item
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server MAC address

NOTE
The second page (detail screen) of the COMMON screen is to be set when the
DNS/DHCP function is used. For details, see Chapter 4, "SETTING THE
DNS/DHCP FUNCTION".

COMMON screen (DETAIL)

Press soft key [COMMON] then page keys to display the COMMON screen (DETAIL). Set
the setting items for DNS IP addresses.

COMMON screen (DETAIL)

Setting item
Item Description
DNS IP ADDRESS 1, 2 Up to two DNS server IP addresses can be set.
The CNC searches for a DNS server in the order from DNS IP address 1 to 2.

- 80 -
 6.SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
B-64014EN/06 SETTING MESSAGING FUNCTION

FOCAS2 screen
Press soft key [FOCAS2] to display the FOCAS2 screen.

FOCAS2 screen

Setting item
Item Description
PORT NUMBER (TCP) Specifies the port No. to be used by the Unsolicited Messaging function
(FOCAS2/Ethernet function), within a range of 5001 to 65535.
PORT NUMBER (UDP) Set 0.
TIME INTERVAL Set 0.

- 81 -
6. SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
MESSAGING FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/06

6.1.1 Selection of Mode

This Subsection describes how to select the mode for setting the Unsolicited Messaging function.

UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen (BASIC)

Press soft key [UNSOLI MSG] to display the UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen (BASIC).

UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen1 (Basic)

Setting item
Item Description
MODE Select the mode for setting the Unsolicited Messaging function.
Refer to the next Operation for the setting method.
For “CNC MODE”:
This mode is for the setting by the CNC screen. In this case, the setting by the personal
computer is impossible. Refer to Subsection 6.1.2, “Setting method by CNC screen” for details.
For “PC MODE”:
This mode is for the setting by the personal computer. In this case, the setting by the CNC
screen is impossible. Refer to Subsection 6.1.3, “Setting method by personal computer” for
details.

NOTE
1 When you use this function for the first time, the mode is “PC MODE”.
2 The change of mode is possible under only the state “Not Ready”. Refer to the
next Display item for the state “Not Ready”.
3 When you change from “CNC MODE” to “PC MODE”, all setting parameters of
the Unsolicited Messaging function are cleared.

Operation
The mode can be changed.

1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display soft key [MODE].

- 82 -
 6.SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
B-64014EN/06 SETTING MESSAGING FUNCTION
2 Press soft key [MODE] to display soft keys [CNC MODE] and [PC MODE].

3 Press soft key of the mode that you want to change.

Display item
Item Description
IP ADDRESS The IP address of the connecting personal computer as a Unsolicited Messaging Server is
displayed.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.1")
STATUS The Current status is displayed.
The kind of status is the following five states.
[1] Not Ready
The state that data are not transmitted even if there is a data transmission request by NC
program or Ladder program.
[2] Ready
The state that data are transmitted by a data transmission request by NC program or Ladder
program.
[3] Sending…
The state from acceptance of the request until completion of data transmission.
[4] Receiving…
The state from completion of data transmission until receiving the response data.
[5] Completed
The state from receiving the response data until completion of receiving operation.

<Complement>
- The data transmission:
This means that the Unsolicited Message is transferred from the CNC to the personal
computer.
- The response data:
This means that the response of Unsolicited Message is transferred from the personal
computer to the CNC.

NOTE
1 Execute the FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstart” from the personal computer to
change the status from “Not Ready” to “Ready”.
2 Execute the FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstop” from the personal computer to
change the status from except for “Not Ready” to “Not Ready”.
3 Refer to Section 6.2, “EXECUTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING
FUNCTION” for timing charts of status.

6.1.2 Setting Method by CNC Screen

This section describes how to set the parameters by the UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen.

NOTE
1 Operate the following procedures in order to enable the parameters and start the
Unsolicited Message transmission.
(1) Set all setting items of the UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen (CONNECT).
(2) Press soft key [(OPRT)] → [APPLY].
(3) Execute FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstart” to start Unsolicited Messaging
from the personal computer.

- 83 -
6. SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
MESSAGING FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/06

NOTE
2 The input to Setting item and the execution of soft key [(OPRT)] → [APPLY] in
the UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen (CONNECT) are possible under only the
state “Not Ready”. Refer to Display item of Subsection 6.1.1, “Selection of mode”
for the status “Not Ready”.

UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen (CONNECT)

Press soft key [UNSOLI MSG] and page keys to display the UNSOLICITED MESSAGE
screen (CONNECT).

UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen 2 (CONNECT) UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen 3 (CONNECT)

Setting item
Item Description
HOST NAME Specify the IP address of the host computer when the DNS function is disabled.
(IP ADDRESS) (Example of specification format: "192.168.0.1")
Specify the host name of the host computer when the DNS function is enabled. (You can
specify up to 63 characters.)
(Example of specification format: "UNSOLI-SRV.FACTORY")
PORT NUMBER Specify a TCP port number and a UDP port number. Usually, specify "8196".
Input range: 5001 to 65535
RETRY COUNT Specify the retry count when the server does not respond to the client message.
Input range: 0 to 32767
TIMEOUT Specify the timeout (second) for the response of the transmitted data.
Input range: 1 to 32767
ALIVE TIME Specify the time interval (in seconds) at which to send the alive signal during normal
operation.
Specify the value that is less than TIMEOUT.
Input range: 1 to 32767

- 84 -
 6.SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
B-64014EN/06 SETTING MESSAGING FUNCTION

Item Description
CONTROL Specify the type of the control parameter. The control parameter is not effective when this
PARAMETER parameter is “0”.
TYPE - “1”: PMC address (Response Notice method)
- “2”: PMC address (Simple method)
- “3”: Custom macro variables (Simple method)
- “4”: Volatile RTM variables (Simple method)
CONTROL Specify the control parameter to execute the data transmission.
PARAMETER In case of CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE “1”:
Specify a PMC address for control.
The available PMC area is R and E.
Two bytes are allowed from this PMC address.
CONTROL In case of CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE “2”:
PARAMETER Specify a PMC address for control.
The available PMC area is R and E.
One byte is allowed from this PMC address.
In case of CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE “3”:
Specify a custom macro variable number for control. The available custom macro
variables are the volatile common variables.
One variable is allowed from this variable number.
In case of CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE “4”:
Specify a RTM variable number for control.
The available RTM variables are the volatile RTM variables.
One variable is allowed from this variable number.
TRANSMISSION Specify a number of the transmission data.
NUMBER Input range: 1 to 3
TRANSMISSION Specify the parameter of each transmission data.
PARAMETER
(NO.1-3)
TYPE Specify the type of the transmission data. The transmission parameters are not effective
when this parameter is “0”.
- “1” or “2”: PMC address
- “3”: Custom macro variables
- “4”: Volatile RTM variables
- “5”: Nonvolatile RTM variables
PMC Specify the top of area for the transmission data.
ADRESS, or In case of TRANSMISSION PARAMETER TYPE “1” or “2”:
MACRO NO. Specify a PMC address for transmission.
In case of TRANSMISSION PARAMETER TYPE “3”:
Specify a custom macro variable number for transmission.
In case of TRANSMISSION PARAMETER TYPE “4” or “5”:
Specify a RTM variable number for transmission.
SIZE, or Specify a size of area or a number for the transmission data.
NUMBER The available maximum size is below.
- For TRANSMISSION NUMBER “1”: 2890 bytes
- For TRANSMISSION NUMBER “2”: 2874 bytes in total
- For TRANSMISSION NUMBER “3”: 2858 bytes in total
Exchange one variable for eight bytes when the macro variables (the custom macro variables
or the RTM variables) are used.
In case of TRANSMISSION PARAMETER TYPE “1” or “2”:
Specify a size of area for the transmission data.
In case of TRANSMISSION PARAMETER TYPE “3”:
Specify a number of the macro variables for the transmission data. And, when the macro
variable number is larger than 1000 (a system variable), specify “1” to this parameter.
In case of TRANSMISSION PARAMETER TYPE “4” or “5”:
Specify a number of the RTM variables for the transmission data.

- 85 -
6. SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
MESSAGING FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/06

WARNING
Before allocating a PMC area or macro variable for the unsolicited messaging
function, fully understand the instructions written in "GENERAL WARNINGS
FOR CNC APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT" in "SAFETY PRECAUTIONS" at
the beginning of this manual.
The area of a PMC address for control cannot overlap any PMC area used for
other than the unsolicited messaging function. The area of a macro variable for
control cannot overlap the area.
If operation is started without checking the above, the machine may behave
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the tool, machine, and/or workpiece,
or injury to the user.

CAUTION
1 In the PMC area, the R area, and E area in volatile memory are all set to 0
immediately after power-on.
2 The E area in the PMC area is normally allocated to volatile memory. However, it
can also be used as nonvolatile memory by setting the option.
When the area is used as nonvolatile memory, the contents of the area are
retained even after the power is turned off. So, special attention should be paid
not to cause an unpredictable operation when the power is turned on next time.

NOTE
1 In the methods to specify a PMC address for CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE,
there are the Response Notice method and the Simple method. Refer to Section
6.2, “EXECUTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING” for details.
2 The available range of a PMC address depends on the available PMC Memory
Type.
3 The available range of a custom macro variable and a RTM variable depends on
the valid option.
The RTM variable means a real-time custom macro variable.
No real-time custom macro variable can be used with the Series 35i-B or Power
Motion i-A.
4 Set the number of TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO.1-3) to TRANSMISSION
NUMBER. For example, when TRANSMISSION NUMBER is “3”, if there are one
or more non-effective value in TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO.1-3), an error
occurs by pressing soft key [APPLY].

PMC address setting

When setting a PMC address for control or transmission, specify it as follows:

Input format)
<Path number>:<PMC address>

For example, for R0500 on the second path of the PMC, input "2:R500".
If <Path number> is omitted (R500), the first path is assumed (1:R0500).
If the <:> key is not available, it can be substituted with the </> key or the <EOB> key. ":" is optional.
To clear "<Path number>:<PMC address>" previously set, input " " (blank). ("---" will be displayed). In
this case, it is assumed that no PMC area is used.

- 86 -
 6.SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
B-64014EN/06 SETTING MESSAGING FUNCTION

Macro variable setting

When setting a macro variable for control or transmission, specify it as follows:

Input format)
<Path number>:<Variable number>

For example, for variable #100 on the second path of the CNC, input "2:100".
If <Path number> is omitted (100), the first path is assumed (1:100).
If the <:> key is not available, it can be substituted with the </> key or the <EOB> key. ":" is optional.
To clear "<Path number>:<Variable number>" previously set, input " " (blank). ("---" will be displayed).
In this case, it is assumed that no macro variable is used.

Operation
The all setting items in UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen (CONNECT) become effective.

1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display soft key [APPLY].

2 Press soft key [APPLY].

6.1.3 Setting Method by Personal Computer

Create Application software by using the FOCAS2 functions if you set the parameters by the personal
computer.
• cnc_wrunsolicprm2 Setting of the parameters for the Unsolicited Messaging (2)
• cnc_unsolicstart Start of the Unsolicited Messaging
Refer to “5. Unsolicited Messaging Function” in “FANUC Open CNC FOCAS1/FOCAS2 CNC/PMC
Data window library” for details

WARNING
Before allocating a PMC area or macro variable for the unsolicited messaging
function, fully understand the instructions written in “GENERAL WARNINGS
FOR CNC APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT” in “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” at the
beginning of this manual.
The area of a PMC address for control cannot overlap any PMC area used for
other than the unsolicited messaging function. The area of a macro variable for
control cannot overlap the area.
If operation is started without checking the above, the machine may behave
unexpectedly, possibly causing damage to the tool, machine, and/or workpiece,
or injury to the user.

NOTE
1 Execute the FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstart” to start the Unsolicited
Message transmission after you execute the FOCAS2 function
“cnc_wrunsolicprm2”.
2 The Execution of the FOCAS2 function “cnc_wrunsolicprm2” is possible under
only the state “Not Ready”. Refer to Display item of Subsection 6.1.1, “Selection
of mode” for the status “Not Ready”.
3 The setting values set by the personal computer are displayed in the
UNSOLICITED MESSAGE screen (CONNECT) after the FOCAS2 function
“cnc_wrunsolicprm2” is executed.
- 87 -
6. SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
MESSAGING FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/06

6.2 EXECUTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION

This section describes how to execute the Unsolicited Messaging function.
The method to execute the Unsolicited Messaging function is the following three ways
• In case of the Response Notice method by using a PMC address for control.
• In case of the Simple method by using a PMC address for control.
• In case of the Simple method by using a macro variable for control.

NOTE
1 When the Ladder program is used, there are the Response Notice method and
the Simple method. A main difference is the followings. In the former, the
response RES_CODE of the data transmission is notified to the Ladder
program. In the latter, the response of the data transmission isn’t notified to the
Ladder program.
Choose the Response Notice when you want to apply the Ladder program used
by Series 16i etc. If it is not necessary to receive the response RES_CODE, it is
easy to use the simple method.
2 RES_CODE is recorded in the LOG screen for the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data
Server when “0x00” or “0x01” as RES_CODE is detected.
3 Refer to “5. Unsolicited Messaging Function” in “FANUC Open CNC
FOCAS1/FOCAS2 CNC/PMC Data window library” for the details of
RES_CODE.

6.2.1 When Using a PMC Address for Control (Response Notice

method)
This subsection describes how to use the Response Notice method.

NOTE
Both a PMC address as the control parameter and a macro variable as the
transmission parameter can be set.
In this case, be careful not to clear which timing value to be read if the Ladder
program transmits a macro variable.
The following explanation describes the case that both the control parameter and
the transmission parameter are PMC addresses.

Signals of PMC address for control

This describes the details of the signals of a PMC address for control when the Unsolicited Messaging
function is used. The area of a PMC address for the control is two bytes. The following indicates the case
that “Rxxxx” is used as a PMC address for control. “Rxxxx” means a PMC address that the PMC path
number is omitted

No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Rxxxx REQ
REQ <Rxxxx.7>
[Name] Signal to request the message transmission
[Classification] Input signal
[Function] Requests the Unsolicited Message transmission.

- 88 -
 6.SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
B-64014EN/06 SETTING MESSAGING FUNCTION
[Operation] Set “1” to this signal after the Ladder program prepares the message. Then the message
will be transmitted to the personal computer.

No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Rxxxx+1 RES COM RES_CODE
RES <Rxxxx+1.7>
[Name] Signal to notify the response of the message
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal indicates that the response of the Unsolicited Message is received.
[Output condition] The response of the message is transmitted from the personal computer to the CNC (the
communication board).
When the CNC (the communication board) receives the response of the message, “1” is
set to this signal. When “1” is set to this signal, the Ladder program reads out the
response code (RES_CODE) and sets “0” to the signal REQ. Then the CNC (the
communication board) will clear RES_CODE and this signal.

COM <Rxxxx+1.6>
[Name] Signal to notify the start of the message transmission
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This signal indicates that the Unsolicited Message transmission is starting.
[Output condition] When the message transmission to the personal computer is started, “1” is set to this
signal. When the message transmission is completed, “0” is set to this signal.

RES_CODE <Rxxxx+1.0> to <Rxxxx+1.5>

[Name] Indicates the response code of the message
[Classification] Output signal
[Function] This code indicates the response code of the Unsolicited Message.
[Output condition] The response code of the message is set. The Ladder program sets “0” to the signal REQ
after reading out this code. Then this code will be cleared by CNC (the communication
board).

NOTE
Refer to “5. Unsolicited Messaging Function” in “FANUC Open
CNC FOCAS1/FOCAS2 CNC/PMC Data window library” for the
details of RES_CODE.

Timing charts of PMC address for control

This describes the timing charts of the signals of a PMC address for control when using the Response
Notice method.
The following example indicates the case that the Unsolicited Message is transmitted only once after the
FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstart” was received, and FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstop” is received.

- 89 -
6. SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
MESSAGING FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/06

FOCAS2 function[cnc_unsolicstart] FOCAS2 function[cnc_unsolicstop]

STATUS Not Ready Ready Sending… Receiving… Completed Ready Not Ready

REQ (Ladder -> Board) <1>

<2>
<6>
COM (Board -> Ladder) <3>

RES (Board -> Ladder) <5>

<4>
<7>
RES_CODE (Board -> Ladder)

Ladder : Ladder Program The data transmission The response

Board : Communication Board has been finished becomes available

<1> The Ladder program prepares the message and sets “1” to the signal REQ after its program confirms
that the signal RES has been “0”.
<2> The communication board sets “1” to the COM signal because “1” is set to the signal REQ, and the
message transmission is started.
<3> The communication board sets “0” to the signal COM when the message transmission is completed.
<4> The communication board sets the RES_CODE and sets “1” to the signal RES when the response of
the message is received.
<5> The Ladder program sets “0” to the signal REQ after its program read out the RES_CODE and the
RES signal is “1”.
<6> The communication board clears the RES_CODE because “0” is set to the signal REQ.
<7> The communication board sets “0” to the signal RES.

NOTE
Refer to Display item in Subsection 6.1.1, “Selection of mode” for the details of
STATUS.

6.2.2 When Using a PMC Address for Control (Simple Method)

This subsection describes how to use the Simple method by a PMC address for control.

NOTE
Both a PMC address as the control parameter and a macro variable as the
transmission parameter can be set.
In this case, be careful not to clear which timing value to be read if the Ladder
program transmits a macro variable.
The following explanation describes the case that both the control parameter and
the transmission parameter are PMC addresses.

Signals of PMC address for control

This describes the details of the signals of a PMC address for control to execute the Unsolicited
Messaging function. The area of a PMC address for the control is one byte. The following indicates the
case that “Rxxxx” is used as a PMC address for control. “Rxxxx” means a PMC address that the PMC
path number is omitted

No. #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Rxxxx REQ
REQ <Rxxxx.7>
[Name] Signal to request the message transmission
- 90 -
 6.SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
B-64014EN/06 SETTING MESSAGING FUNCTION
[Classification] Input signal/Output signal
[Function] Requests the Unsolicited Message transmission.
[Operation] Set “1” to this signal after the Ladder program prepare the message. Then the message
will be transmitted to the personal computer. When the response of the message is
received, this signal is cleared by CNC (the communication board).

Timing charts of PMC address for control

This describes the timing charts of the signals of a PMC address for control when using the Simple
method.
The following example indicates the case that the Unsolicited Message is transmitted only once after the
FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstart” was received, and FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstop” is received.

FOCAS2 function[cnc_unsolicstart] FOCAS2 function[cnc_unsolicstop]

STATUS Not Ready Ready Sending… Receiving… Completed Ready Not Ready

REQ (Ladder <-> Board) <1> <2>

<5>
Transmitting operation(Board) <3>

Receiving operation(Board) <4>

Ladder : Ladder Program The data transmission The response is

Board : Communication Board has been finished received

<1> The Ladder program prepares the message and sets “1” to the signal REQ after its program confirms
that the signal REQ has been “0”.
<2> The communication board transmits the message because “1” is set to the signal REQ.
<3> The transmitting operation of the communication board is completed.
<4> The receiving operation of the communication board is completed after the response of the message
is received.
<5> The communication board sets “0” to the signal REQ after the receiving operation is completed.

NOTE
1 The REQ signal is also set to “0” when transmission terminates abnormally.
When it is necessary to check the transmission result, use the Response Notice
method described in Subsection 6.2.1.
2 Refer to Display item in Subsection 6.1.1, “Selection of mode” for the details of
STATUS.

6.2.3 When Using a Macro Variable for Control (Simple Method)

This subsection describes how to use the Simple method by a macro variable for control.
The way to use a custom macro variable and a RTM variable in the macro variables for control is the
same.

- 91 -
6. SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
MESSAGING FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/06

NOTE
Both a macro variable as the control parameter and a PMC address as the
transmission parameter can be set.
In this case, be careful not to clear which timing value to be read if the NC
program transmits a PMC data.
The following explanation describes the case that both the control parameter and
the transmission parameter are macro variables.

Macro Variables for control

This describes the details of the macro variable for control to execute the Unsolicited Messaging function.
The area of the macro variable for control is one variable. The following indicates the case that “#xxxx”
is used as a macro variable for control. “#xxxx” means a macro variable that the CNC path number is
omitted

REQ <#xxxx>
[Name] Variable to request the message transmission
[Classification] Input variable/Output variable
[Function] Requests the Unsolicited Message transmission.
[Operation] Set “1” to this variable after the NC program prepare the message. Then the message will
be transmitted to the personal computer. When the response of the message received, this
variable is cleared by CNC (the communication board).

NOTE
The input and output value in the variable REQ is a real number. Therefore “0”
and “1” indicate “0.0” and “1.0”.

Timing charts of macro variables for control

This describes the timing charts of the macro variable for control when using the Simple method.
The following example indicates the case that the Unsolicited Message is transmitted only once after the
FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstart” was received, and FOCAS2 function “cnc_unsolicstop” is received.

FOCAS2 function[cnc_unsolicstart] FOCAS2 function[cnc_unsolicstop]

STATUS Not Ready Ready Sending… Receiving… Completed Ready Not Ready

1
REQ (NC <-> Board) 0 <1> <2>
<5>
Transmitting operation(Board) <3>

Receiving operation(Board) <4>

NC : NC Program The data transmission The response is

Board : Communication Board has been finished received

<1> The NC program prepares the message and sets “1” to the variable REQ after its program confirms
that the variable REQ has been “0”.
<2> The communication board transmits the message because “1” is set to the variable REQ.
<3> The transmitting operation of the communication board is completed.
- 92 -
 6.SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
B-64014EN/06 SETTING MESSAGING FUNCTION
<4> The receiving operation of the communication board is completed after the response of the message
is received.
<5> The communication board sets “0” to the variable REQ after the receiving operation is completed.

NOTE
1 The REQ signal is also set to “0” when transmission terminates abnormally.
When it is necessary to check the transmission result, use the Response Notice
method described in Subsection 6.2.1.
2 Refer to Display item in Subsection 6.1.1, “Selection of mode” for the details of
STATUS.

Example to use macro variables for control

This describes the example to use the macro variable for control.

• Example
[Contents]
In the NC program of the CNC path number “1”, the way to transmit the date and time by using
macro variables is explained.

[Setting]
The volatile RTM variable number #0 (REQ) is used as the macro variable for control. And, the
date and time (the system variable number #3011, #3012) managed in the CNC are used as the
macro variable for transmission.

Setting item Setting value

CONTROL PARAMETER TYPE 4
CONTROL PARAMETER 1:0
TRANSMISSION NUMBER 2
TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO.1)
TYPE 3
MACRO NO. 1:3011
NUMBER 1
TRANSMISSION PARAMETER (NO.2)
TYPE 3
MACRO NO. 1:3012
NUMBER 1

[Example of the NC program]

The RTM executes the next NC command of the RTM at the same time. At this time, the RTM
doesn't influence the operation timing of the next NC command of the RTM.
Therefore, the date and time when the NC command 2 is executed is notified.

- 93 -
6. SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
MESSAGING FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/06

RTM for control of the Unsolicited Messaging

//1 ZDO;
ZWHILE[#RV[0] NE 0]; <1>
NC Program #RV[0]=1;
・ ZEND;
・
・
NC Command 1

One cycle of the Macro Call Command

machining program NC Command 2
・
・
・

(Reference) <1> in the example corresponds to <1> in the timing charts above.

NOTE
If a custom macro variable is used as the macro variable for control, be careful
to influence the operation timing of the NC command. For example, if the RTM
for control of the above example is replaced to a custom macro, the NC
command 2 isn’t executed unless the macro variable for control changes. Refer
to OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center
System) for the details of a custom macro and a RTM.

6.3 RELATED NC PARAMETERS

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0904 DHC DNS UNM

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#4 UNM The CNC Unsolicited Messaging function is:

0: Not used.
1: Used.
#5 DNS The DNS function is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
#6 DHC The DHCP function is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.

NOTE
1 When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.
2 To use the DNS function, set DNS IP ADDRESS 1 and DNS IP
ADDRESS 2 on the COMMON (DETAIL) screen.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0905 UNS

[Input type] Parameter input

- 94 -
 6.SETTING THE UNSOLICITED
B-64014EN/06 SETTING MESSAGING FUNCTION
[Data type] Bit

#4 UNS In the Unsolicited Messaging function, when the stop request of the Unsolicited
Messaging function is received excluding the connecting Unsolicited Messaging server:
0: The stop request is rejected.
1: The stop request is accepted.

- 95 -
7. SETTING THE FTP FILE
TRANSFER FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/06

7 SETTING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER

FUNCTION
This chapter describes the setting of parameters for the FTP File Transfer function.

Notes on using the FTP File Transfer function

WARNING
To input or output data, the use of the ISO code input/output function is
recommended.
Parity information is not contained with data input/output using the ASCII code.
So, the use of the ASCII code is dangerous since any data corrupted during
input/output operation with the CNC is not detected.
If data corruption occurs, the machine may behave unexpectedly, possibly
causing damage to the tool, machine, and/or workpiece, or injury to the user.
For details of the ISO code input/output function, see Section 2.8, "ISO CODE
INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION" in Part II, “SPECIFICATION”.
With the Series 30i/31i/32i-A, the ISO code input/output function cannot be
used.

CAUTION
Before performing FTP communication using the Fast Ethernet for the first time,
consult with your network administrator, carefully set a network address and
other items, and conduct communication tests thoroughly. Any error in settings
such as a network address setting can lead to an adverse influence such as a
communication failure on the entire network.
Be very careful about any communication failure. If the Ethernet is used on a
network involved with a communication failure, a communication failure
intermittently occurs in the Ethernet, which may cause a CNC system error.

NOTE
1 With the FTP File Transfer function (FTP client), a single CNC can connect only
one FTP server.
2 The FTP File Transfer function of Series 30i/31i/32i-A do not support passive
mode (PASV command).
3 When many files are registered in the host computer, it may take time to display
a file list on the HOST FILE LIST screen.
In this case, take action, such as dividing the directory containing registered
files.
4 When the Data Server function option (S737) is valid, the FTP File Transfer
function is unavailable.
Use the Data Server functions.

- 96 -
 7.SETTING THE FTP FILE
B-64014EN/06 SETTING TRANSFER FUNCTION

7.1 SETTING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION

This section describes the setting screen for operating the FTP File Transfer function.

Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B or Power Motion i-A)
appears. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] to display the Ethernet Setting screen.
4 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FTP TRANS] and then enter parameters for the items that appear.

COMMON screen (BASIC)

Press soft key [COMMON] to display the COMMON screen (BASIC).

COMMON screen (BASIC)

Setting item
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the Fast Ethernet.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.
(Example of specification format: "255.255.255.0")
ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.
Specify this item when the network contains a router.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.253")

Display item
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Fast Ethernet MAC address

- 97 -
7. SETTING THE FTP FILE
TRANSFER FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/06

NOTE
The second page (detail screen) of the COMMON screen is to be set when the
DNS/DHCP function is used. For details, see Chapter 4, "SETTING THE
DNS/DHCP FUNCTION".

FTP Trans screens (CONNECT1, CONNECT2, CONNECT3)

Press soft key [FTP TRANS] to display the FTP Trans screen.
By using page keys , the three host computers at connection destinations 1, 2, and 3 can be
set.

FTP Trans screens (for connection destination 1)

Setting item
Item Description
HOST NAME Specify the IP address of the host computer.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.200")
PORT NUMBER Specify the port number. Usually, set 21 because the FTP communication is used.
USER NAME Specify the name of the user to log on to the host computer using FTP. (A user
name of up to 31 characters can be specified.)
Be sure to set the user name.
PASSWORD Specify the password for the above user name.
The password must always be specified.
LOGIN FOLDER Specify a work folder to be used when the user logs in to the host computer. (Up to
127 characters can be specified.)
If no data is set, the home folder set on the host computer is used as a login folder.

Operation
Select a connection destination.

1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display soft key [HOST SELECT]. Then, press soft key [HOST
SELECT] to display soft keys [CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], and [CONECT 3].

- 98 -
 7.SETTING THE FTP FILE
B-64014EN/06 SETTING TRANSFER FUNCTION

2 Press one of soft keys [CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], and [CONECT 3] according to the host
computer to which you want to make a connection. The screen title of connection destination 1, 2 or
3 is displayed in reverse video. The screen title displayed in reverse video indicates the connection
destination host computer.

When connection destination 1 is selected

7.2 RELATED NC PARAMETERS

The NC parameters related to the FTP File Transfer function are described below.

0020 I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 5 : Selects the FTP File transfer function as the input/output device.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0901 EFT

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#1 EFT The FTP file transfer function by the Fast Ethernet board is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.

NOTE
1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
2 This parameter is valid only for Path 1.
3 If Data Server function option (S737) is valid, FTP File Transfer
function cannot be used.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0905 PCH

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#1 PCH At the start of communication of the Data Server, FTP file transfer function, or machine
remote diagnosis functions, checking for the presence of the server using PING is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.

- 99 -
7. SETTING THE FTP FILE
TRANSFER FUNCTION SETTING B-64014EN/06

NOTE
Usually, set Performed (0).
When the presence of the server using PING is not checked by
setting 1, it may take several tens of seconds until an error is
recognized due to no server on the network.
For mainly security reasons, a personal computer may be set so
that it does not respond to the PING command. Set 1 when the
Data Server communicates with such a personal computer.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0906 PSV

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

#3 PSV The FTP clients of the Data Server functions or FTP file transfer function operate in:
0: Active mode.
1: Passive mode.

NOTE
1 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
2 This parameter is only available with the Series 30i/31i/32i–B.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0908 ISO

[Input type] Setting input

[Data type] Bit

#0 ISO When a Data Server is selected as an I/O device, data input/output is performed using
0: ASCII codes.
1: ISO codes.

NOTE
This parameter is only available with the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i –B
and Power Motion i-A.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0909 HDS

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Bit

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

#0 HDS High-speed file search in the FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE LIST screen is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

- 100 -
 7.SETTING THE FTP FILE
B-64014EN/06 SETTING TRANSFER FUNCTION

NOTE
1 File search operation differs depending on the setting of this
parameter.
- When "0" is set, a file name starting with the search string is
searched for.
- When "1" is set, file names are searched for an exact match for
the search setting. If no exact match is found, a file name
starting with the search string is searched for.
For example, assume that files ABCD, AAA, ABC, and BBB are
listed in this order and the search string is "ABC". When "0" is set,
"ABCD" is found. When "1" is set, "ABC" is found.
2 When this parameter is set to "1", a file may not be able to be
searched for correctly in the DETAIL ON mode, depending on the
FTP server software used. In this case, perform a search in the
DETAIL OFF mode.

0921 Selects the host computer 1 OS.

0922 Selects the host computer 2 OS.
0923 Selects the host computer 3 OS.

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Word
[Valid data range] 0 to 2
0: Windows95/98/Me/NT/2000/XP/Vista/7.
1: UNIX/VMS.
2: Linux.

NOTE
Some FTP server software may not depend on the OS. Therefore,
the valid file list may not be displayed by the above setting.

- 101 -
8. ERROR MESSAGES DISPLAYED
DURING PARAMETER SETTING SETTING B-64014EN/06

8 ERROR MESSAGES DISPLAYED DURING

PARAMETER SETTING
This chapter explains the error messages that are issued when Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server parameters
are set.

Messages Meaning and action to be taken

Communication Software is not found Check whether the communication software is installed.
Ethernet board is not found Check whether the Fast Ethernet board is installed.
Software Version Error The communication software version is illegal.
Check the software version.
DATA IS OUT OF RANGE A numeric parameter value is beyond the range.
Wrong Character(s) An illegal character is used in a character parameter.
Format Error Input data such as an IP address has an illegal input format.
too many figures A value input in a numeric parameter consists of too many digits.
Data was rejected A parameter error is found.
Confirm the setting conditions described in the relevant manual.
Reading from SRAM failed SRAM may have been destroyed.
Writing into SRAM failed SRAM may have been destroyed.
DHCP is available When the DHCP function is enabled, it is impossible to input parameters
manually from the setting screen.
To input parameters manually, disable the DHCP function.
Error(xxxx) Other errors.
Report the displayed message.

- 102 -
IV. OPERATION
 1.OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/06 OPERATION FUNCTIONS

1 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER

FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes how to operate the Data Server functions.

On the PROGRAM FOLDER screen, files on the CNC memory, memory card, host computer connected
via the embedded Ethernet, memory card built into the Fast Data Server, or host computer connected via
the Fast Data Server can be handled by selecting a device.
Series 30i/31i/32i-A/B

CNC memory

Memory card
Via embedded
Ethernet
File list

FAST Data Server

Memory card
PROGRAM FOLDER screen Via FAST Data Server

File list

In this chapter, the method of handling files on the memory card built into the Fast Data Server and on the
host computer connected via the Fast Data Server is described.

1.1 DEVICE CHANGE ON THE PROGRAM FOLDER SCREEN

Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Press soft key [FOLDER] to display the PROGRAM FOLDER screen. (When there is no soft keys,
press the continue key.)

- 105 -
1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64014EN/06

PROGRAM FOLDER screen

3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [DEVICE CHANGE] to display the soft keys for selectable
devices.

4 When you press soft key [DTSVR], the information displayed on the PROGRAM FOLDER screen
is changed to the contents (DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen) of the memory card built into the
Fast Data Server to enable file operation.
5 When you press soft key [DTSVR HOST], the information displayed on the PROGRAM FOLDER
screen is changed to the contents (DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen) of the hard disk of the
host computer to enable file operation.

1.2 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FILE LIST SCREEN

If [DTSVR] is selected to change the device on the PROGRAM FOLDER screen, the contents (DATA
SERVER FILE LIST screen) of the memory card built into the Fast Data Server are displayed to enable
file operation.

The information displayed on the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen partly changes, depending on the
setting of bit 1 (PDM) of parameter No. 3233.
When bit 1 (PDM) of parameter No. 3233 is set to 0, an M198 operation folder and DNC operation file
can be set.
When bit 1 (PDM) of parameter No. 3233 is set to 1, foreground/background folders can be set.

- 106 -
 1.OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/06 OPERATION FUNCTIONS

DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen / When bit 1 (PDM) of parameter No. 3233=0

DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen / When bit 1 (PDM) of parameter No. 3233=1

Display item
M198 OPE FOLDER
Displays a folder (directory) for M198-based subprogram calling. This item is displayed when bit 1
(PDM) of parameter No. 3233 is set to 0.

- 107 -
1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64014EN/06

DNC OPE FILE

Displays a file name used when DNC operation is performed. This item is displayed when bit 1 (PDM) of
parameter No. 3233 is set to 0.

FOREGROUND FOLDER / BACKGROUND FOLDER

Displays foreground/background folders (directories). This item is displayed when bit 1 (PDM) of
parameter No. 3233 is set to 1.

CONNECT HOST
Displays the work folder and the number of the host currently connected.

USED PAGE / FREE PAGE

Displays the size used of the memory card built into the Fast Data Server and the size that is free.

USED FILES / FREE FILES

Displays the total number of folders (files) in use of the Data Server and the number of remaining free
folders (files).

DEVICE
Displays the current device. If the memory card built into the Fast Data Server is selected, "DATA_SV"
is indicated.

CURRENT FOLDER
Displays the current work folder.

File list
Displays information about the files and folders in the current work folder.

Operation list
DEVICE CHANGE
Enables a device for display on the PROGRAM FOLDER screen. When selecting the memory card built
into the Fast Data Server, press soft key [DTSVR].

DNC SET
Specifies a file for DNC operation. This soft key can be used when bit 1 (PDM) of parameter No. 3233 is
set to 0.

M198 SET
Specifies a folder for M198-based subprogram calling. This soft key can be used when bit 1 (PDM) of
parameter No. 3233 is set to 0.

FORE CHANGE / BACK CHNAGE

Specifies a foreground/background folder. These soft keys can be used when bit 1 (PDM) of parameter
No. 3233 is set to 1.

MAIN PROGRM
Selects a file as a main program.

DETAIL OFF / DETAIL ON

Switches the file list information to overall display or detail display.

- 108 -
 1.OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/06 OPERATION FUNCTIONS

CREATE FOLDER
Creates a sub-folder under the current work folder.

DELETE
Deletes a file or folder.

RENAME
Renames a file or folder.

SELECT START
Selects multiple files.

COPY
Copies a file or files.

MOVE
Moves a file or files from one folder to another.

SEARCH
Searches for a file in the current work folder.

PUT
Transfers a file from the Data Server to the host computer.

MPUT
Transfers multiple files from the Data Server to the host computer.

LIST-PUT
Transfers multiple files from the Data Server to the host computer according to a list file.

LIST-DELETE
Deletes multiple files from the Data Server according to a list file.

READ (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-A)

F INPUT (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-B)
Inputs an NC program in the host computer to part program storage of the CNC. This soft key is enabled
only when the Data Server is in the storage mode and EDIT mode, and parameter No. 20 is set to “5”.

PUNCH (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-A)

F OUTPUT (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-B)
Outputs an NC program in part program storage of the CNC to the host computer. This soft key is
enabled only when the Data Server is in the storage mode and EDIT mode, and parameter No. 20 is set to
“5”.

REFRESH
Updates the display information of the PROGRAM FOLDER screen.

- 109 -
1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64014EN/06

NOTE
The operations of soft keys [CREATE FOLDER], [DELETE], [RENAME],
[COPY], [MOVE], and [LIST-DELETE] are the target operations of the memory
protection key.
This means that when the memory protection key is enabled, these operations
result in a "WRITE PROTECT" error and cannot be performed.
For information about the memory protection key, refer to the CONNECTION
MANUAL (FUNCTION) of the CNC.

1.2.1 Displaying and Operating the File List

REFRESH, DETAIL OFF, DETAIL ON
The contents of the file list can be updated and displayed.

1 Press soft key [REFRESH] to update the contents of the file list.
2 Press soft key [DETAIL OFF] to display a file name, size, and date.
3 Press soft key [DETAIL ON] to display a file list with file attributes and comments. A comment
statement immediately following the O number of a file is displayed. When there is no comment
statement, the contents starting with the beginning of the file are displayed.

NOTE
1 For a file selected as a main program and a file being used for memory
operation, no comment is displayed in detail display mode.
2 The file attribute of a binary file is displayed as "R/B" to the right of the comment.

MOVE FOLDER
A work folder can be moved.

1 By using cursor keys , select a folder to be moved.

2 Press the MDI key .

CREATE FOLDER
A new folder can be created.

1 Move to a new folder to be created.

2 Enter a desired folder name.
3 Press soft key [CREATE FOLDER].

NOTE
1 Up to six levels of folders can be created.
2 No duplicate folder name is allowed within the same folder.
3 Each time a folder is created, the number of programs that can be registered
decreases by one.
4 No folder may be able to be created, depending on the status such as operation
state or protection state.

- 110 -
 1.OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/06 OPERATION FUNCTIONS

DELETE
Specifying a file or folder
A file or folder can be deleted.

1 By using cursor keys , select a file or folder to be deleted.

2 Press soft key [DELETE].
- Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
- Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

NOTE
1 The initial folder cannot be deleted.
2 A folder can be deleted only when the folder is empty.
(An empty folder means a folder that does not contain any folder and file.)
3 Files or folders may not be able to be deleted, depending on the status such as
operation state or protection state.

Specifying multiple files

Multiple files can be deleted at a time.

1 Press soft key [SELECT START].

2 By using cursor keys , select a file to be deleted.
3 Press soft key [SELECT].
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for files to be deleted.
4 Press soft key [DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

NOTE
1 No folder can be specified.
2 Files may not be able to be deleted, depending on the status such as operation
state or protection state.
3 Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.

DELETE (new procedure)

Specifying a file or folder
A file or folder can be deleted.

1 Place the cursor on the name of a file or folder to be deleted.

2 Press soft key [DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

Selecting a range
Multiple files or folders can be deleted.

1 Press soft key [SELECT].

2 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be deleted and press soft key [RANGE SELECT].

- 111 -
1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64014EN/06

3 By using cursor keys , select a range of files to be deleted.

A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
4 When you have selected a desired range, press soft key [DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

Selecting individual files or folders

Multiple files or folders can be deleted.

1 Press soft key [SELECT].

2 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be deleted and press soft key [SELECT].
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
3 Repeat step 2 for all files to be selected.
4 When you have selected desired files, press soft key [DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

NOTE
1 Delete operation of the new procedure is performed when bit 3 (PCP) of
parameter No. 11374 is set to 1 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A or bit 4 (PCB) of
parameter No. 11374 is set to 0 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-B.
2 The initial folder cannot be deleted.
3 Folders can also be specified and deleted only when the folders are empty.
(An empty folder means a folder that does not contain any folder and file.)
4 Files or folders may not be able to be deleted, depending on the status such as
operation state or protection state.
5 Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.

RENAME
A file or folder can be renamed.

1 By using cursor keys , select a file or folder to be renamed.

2 Key a new file name or folder name.
3 Press soft key [RENAME].

NOTE
1 The initial folder cannot be renamed.
2 No duplicate folder name is allowed within the same folder.
3 Files and folders may not be able to be renamed, depending on the status such
as operation state or protection state.

SEARCH
In the current work folder, a file can be found.

1 Enter a desired file name.

2 Press soft key [SEARCH].

- 112 -
 1.OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/06 OPERATION FUNCTIONS

COPY
Only one file
A file can be copied within the same folder.

1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.

2 By using cursor keys , select a copy source file.
3 Key the name of a copy destination file.
4 Press soft key [COPY].

NOTE
1 Copy operation is impossible if the same file name is specified as a copy source
file and copy destination file.
2 No folder can be specified.
3 Files may not be able to be copied, depending on the status such as operation
state or protection state.

Selecting individual files or folders

Multiple files can be copied.

1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.

2 Press soft key [SELECT START].
3 By using cursor keys , select a copy source file.
4 Press soft key [SELECT].
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for files to be copied.
5 Press soft key [SELECT END].
6 Move to a copy destination folder.
7 Press soft key [COPY].

NOTE
1 Copy operation is impossible if the same folder is specified as a copy source
folder and copy destination folder.
2 No folder can be specified.
3 Files may not be able to be copied, depending on the status such as operation
state or protection state.
4 Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.

COPY (new procedure)

Only one file
One file can be copied.

1 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be copied and press soft key [COPY].
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
2 Move to a copy destination folder.
3 Press soft key [PASTE].
To rename and copy the file, enter the new file name in the key-in buffer and press soft key
[PASTE].

- 113 -
1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64014EN/06

Selecting a range
Multiple files can be copied.

1 Press soft key [SELECT].

2 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be copied and press soft key [RANGE SELECT].
3 By using cursor keys , select a range of files to be copied.
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
4 When you have selected a desired range, press soft key [COPY].
5 Move to a copy destination folder.
6 Press soft key [PASTE].

Selecting individual files or folders

Multiple files can be copied.

1 Press soft key [SELECT].

2 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be copied and press soft key [SELECT].
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
3 Repeat step 2 for all files to be selected.
4 When you have selected desired files, press soft key [COPY].
5 Move to a copy destination folder.
6 Press soft key [PASTE].

NOTE
1 Copy operation of the new procedure is performed when bit 3 (PCP) of
parameter No. 11374 is set to 1 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A or bit 4 (PCB) of
parameter No. 11374 is set to 0 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-B.
2 With copy operation of the new procedure, not only a file or files, but also a
folder or folders can be selected. In this case, all files in the selected folder(s)
are copied.
3 Copy operation is impossible if the same folder is specified as a copy source
folder and copy destination folder.
4 Files or folders may not be able to be copied, depending on the status such as
operation state or protection state.
5 Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.

MOVE
A file or files can be moved.

1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.

2 Press soft key [SELECT START].
3 By using cursor keys , select a move source file.
4 Press soft key [SELECT].
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for files to be moved.
5 Press soft key [SELECT END].
6 Move to a move destination folder.
7 Press soft key [MOVE].

- 114 -
 1.OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/06 OPERATION FUNCTIONS

NOTE
1 Move operation is impossible if the same folder is specified as a move source
folder and move destination folder.
2 No folder can be specified.
3 Files may not be able to be moved, depending on the status such as operation
state or protection state.
4 Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.

MOVE (new procedure)

Only one file
One file can be moved.

1 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be moved and press soft key [CUT].
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
2 Move to a move destination folder.
3 Press soft key [PASTE].
To rename and move the file, enter the new file name in the key-in buffer and press soft key
[PASTE].

Selecting a range
Multiple files can be moved.

1 Press soft key [SELECT].

2 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be moved and press soft key [RANGE SELECTT].
3 By using cursor keys , select a range of files to be moved.
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
4 When you have selected a desired range, press soft key [CUT].
5 Move to a move destination folder.
6 Press soft key [PASTE].

Selecting individual files or folders

Multiple files can be moved.

1 Press soft key [SELECT].

2 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be moved and press soft key [SELECTT].
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
3 Repeat step 2 for all files to be selected.
4 When you have selected desired files, press soft key [CUT].
5 Move to a move destination folder.
6 Press soft key [PASTE].

NOTE
1 Move operation of the new procedure is performed when bit 3 (PCP) of
parameter No. 11374 is set to 1 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A or bit 4 (PCB) of
parameter No. 11374 is set to 0 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-B.
2 With move operation of the new procedure, not only a file or files, but also a
folder or folders can be selected. In this case, all files in the selected folder(s)
are moved.
3 Move operation is impossible if the same folder is specified as a move source
folder and move destination folder.

- 115 -
1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64014EN/06

NOTE
4 Files or folders may not be able to be moved, depending on the status such as
operation state or protection state.
5 Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.

LIST-DELETE
By using a list file, multiple files in the Data Server can be deleted.

1 By using cursor keys , select a list file.

2 Press soft key [LIST-DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

When execution is selected, the files in the Data Server are deleted according to the list file.

NOTE
Files cannot sometimes be deleted depending on the operation status and
protection status.

1.2.2 File Transfer Operation

Files can be transferred from the Data Server to the host computer.

NOTE
If an error occurs, check the cause of the error according to the Item,
“ETHERNET LOG screen” in Section 2.1, “ETHERNET LOG” in Part VI,
“MAINTENANCE.”

PUT
A file can be transferred from the Data Server to the host computer.

1 By using cursor keys , select a file to be transferred.

2 Press soft key [PUT].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
3 When a file is to be transferred to the host computer under a different file name, enter the desired
transfer destination file name before pressing soft key [PUT].

MPUT
Multiple files can be transferred from the Data Server to the host computer.

1 Enter the names of files to be transferred. Specify the names of files using wildcards (*, ?).
2 Press soft key [MPUT].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

- 116 -
 1.OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/06 OPERATION FUNCTIONS

LIST-PUT
Multiple files can be transferred from the Data Server to the host computer according to a list file.

1 By using cursor keys , select a list file.

2 Press soft key [LIST-PUT].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

When execution is selected, the files are transferred from the Data Server to the host computer
according to the list file.

1.2.3 Preparations for File Operation and Editing

MAIN PROGRM
A selected file can be registered as a main program.

1 Select the EDIT mode or MEM mode.

2 By using cursor keys , select a file to be registered as a main program.
3 Press soft key [MAIN PROGRM].

A registered main program can be executed in memory operation or edited.

NOTE
1 No file may be able to be selected, depending on the status such as operation
state or protection state.
2 Only a text file can be selected as a main program.
3 For a file selected as a main program and a file being used for memory
operation, no comment is displayed in detail display mode.
4 For a file selected as a main program, other file operations are disabled.
5 For memory operation and editing, refer to the OPERATOR’S MANUAL of the
CNC.

M198 SET
A folder for M198-based subprogram calling can be specified.

1 Move to the folder containing a file to be called by M198-based subprogram calling.

2 Press soft key [M198 SET].

NOTE
1 No file may be able to be set, depending on the status such as operation state or
protection state.
2 This setting is valid when the operating mode of the Data Server is the storage
mode.
3 The specified folder name is stored and can be used without specifying it at the
next power-on.

- 117 -
1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64014EN/06

DNC SET
A file used for DNC operation can be selected.

1 Move to the folder containing a file to be used for DNC operation.

2 By using cursor keys , select a file to be used for DNC operation.
3 Press soft key [DNC SET].

NOTE
1 No file may be able to be set, depending on the status such as operation state or
protection state.
2 This setting is valid when the operating mode of the Data Server is the storage
mode.
3 The specified file name is not stored. Accordingly, specify a file again after
turning the power off, then on again.

FORE CHANGE / BACK CHANGE

A foreground/background folder can be specified.

1 Move to the folder containing a foreground/background file.

2 Press soft key [FORE CHANGE] or [BACK CHANGE].

1.2.4 File Operation between the Data Server and USB Memory
You can copy files or folders between the Data Server and USB memory.
By selecting a folder, you can copy the files or folders in that folder.

NOTE
1 This function is only available with the Series 30i/31i/32i-B.
2 The function is valid when bit 4 (PCB) of parameter No. 11374 is set to 0.
3 Files and folders cannot be moved.

Copying a file or folder

1 Place all paths in the EDIT mode or emergency stop state.
2 Select a copy source device and move to a copy source folder.
3 Place the cursor on the file or folder to be copied and press soft key [COPY].
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
4 Select a copy destination device and move to a copy destination folder.
5 Press soft key [PASTE].
To rename and copy the file or folder, enter the new file or folder name in the key-in buffer and
press soft key [PASTE].
6 To copy a file or folder from the USB memory to the Data Server, press soft key To copy a file or
folder from the USB memory to the Data Server, press soft key [PROGRAM] or [DATA] to specify
the attribute (program or data) of the copy destination file. (Note 1)
To rename and copy the file or folder, enter the new file or folder name in the key-in buffer before
pressing soft key [PROGRAM] or [DATA].

Copying multiple files or folders

Selecting a range
1 Place all paths in the EDIT mode or emergency stop state.
- 118 -
 1.OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/06 OPERATION FUNCTIONS
2 Select a copy source device and move to a copy source folder.
3 Press soft key [SELECT].
4 Place the cursor on the file or folder to be copied and press soft key [RANGE SELECT].
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
5 By using cursor keys , select a range of files to be copied.
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
6 When you have selected a desired range, press soft key [COPY].
7 Select a copy destination device and move to a copy destination folder.
8 Press soft key [PASTE].
9 To copy a file or folder from the USB memory to the Data Server, press soft key [PROGRAM] or
[DATA] to specify the attribute (program or data) of the copy destination file.(Note 1)

Selecting individual files or folders

1 Place all paths in the EDIT mode or emergency stop state.
2 Select a copy source device and move to a copy source folder.
3 Press soft key [SELECT].
4 Place the cursor on the file or folder to be copied and press soft key [SELECT].
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
5 Repeat step 4 for all files or folders to be selected.
6 Select a copy destination device and move to a copy destination folder.
7 Press soft key [PASTE].
8 To copy a file or folder from the USB memory to the Data Server, press soft key [PROGRAM] or
[DATA] to specify the attribute (program or data) of the copy destination file.(Note 1)

WARNING
When a file containing multiple programs is copied from the USB memory to the
Data Server, the file is not divided into the programs and the programs are not
registered individually on the Data Server. The programs are registered as one
series of programs. Be sure to copy a file containing one program. Operating the
machine after copying a file containing multiple programs is dangerous because
the machine may behave unexpectedly.

NOTE
1 The program (text file) attribute can be specified only when bit 1 (DUC) of
parameter No. 24309 is set to 1.
On the Data Server, various types of data can be saved in addition to text format
NC programs.
To handle text format NC programs, set the program (text file) attribute. To
handle NC programs for high-speed binary operation and NC data other than
text format NC programs, set the data (binary file) attribute. For details of
programs (text files) and data (binary files), see Section 2.1, "DATA SERVER
FILE MANAGEMENT" in Part II, "SPECIFICATION".
2 To copy multiple files from the USB memory to the Data Server, do not select
program files and data files simultaneously. When multiple files are selected, the
specified attribute is set for all selected files. When a folder is selected, the
specified attribute is also set for all files in the folder.
3 If the system is placed in other than the EDIT mode or emergency stop state
during copy operation between the Data Server and USB memory, the copy
operation is stopped. Do not change the mode during copy operation.
4 Files or folders may not be able to be copied, depending on the status such as
operation state or protection state.
- 119 -
1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64014EN/06

NOTE
5 Up to 10 files or folders can be selected individually or by selecting a range.

Copying a file or folder when a file or folder having the same name is found
If a file or folder having the same name as a file or folder to be copied is found in the copy destination,
the confirmation message, "OVERWRITE? (program or folder name)" is displayed.

- Press soft key [YES] to overwrite only the found file or folder. If another file or folder having the
same name is found, the confirmation message is displayed again.
- Press soft key [NO] to continue with copy operation without overwriting the found file or folder. If
another file or folder having the same name is found, the confirmation message is displayed again.
- Press soft key [YES ALL] to continue with copy operation while overwriting the found file or folder
and subsequently found files or folders.
- Press soft key [NO ALL] to continue with copy operation without overwriting the found file or
folder and subsequently found files or folders.
- Press soft key [CANCEL] or [<] to terminate copy operation.

If another screen is displayed while the confirmation message is being displayed, overwrite operation is
canceled and copy operation is stopped.

Limitations
If the following condition is met, copy operation is disabled:
- The copy destination folder is a subfolder of the copy source folder.

If any of the following conditions is met, the relevant file or folder is not copied:
- The copy source or destination file or folder is protected by a function such as the program
protection function.
- The protection level (output) is higher than the operation level of 8-level data protection.
- An attempt is made to overwrite a file containing a main program or a program during operation.
- The folder path depth after copy operation exceeds six levels.

If a folder containing a file or folder which cannot be copied is specified as the copy source, copy
operation is stopped. Files or folders are copied to the copy destination before copy operation is stopped.
If a folder cannot be copied, the files or folders in that folder cannot also be copied.

- 120 -
 1.OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/06 OPERATION FUNCTIONS

1.3 OPERATING THE DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST

SCREEN
Host computer files can be operated on the DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen.

DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen

NOTE
A file name containing a 2-byte code used for Japanese and others may not be
displayed correctly.

Display item
M198 OPE FOLDER
Displays a folder (directory) for M198-based subprogram calling.

DNC OPE FILE

Displays a file name used when DNC operation is performed.

DT SERVER FOLDER
Displays the work folder (directory) of the Data Server (memory card).

CONNECT HOST
Displays the number of the host computer currently connected.

DEVICE
Displays the current device. If the host file list of the Data Server is selected, "DTSVR_HOST" is
indicated.

CURRENT FOLDER
Displays the work folder in the current host computer.

- 121 -
1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64014EN/06

FILE LIST
Displays information about the files and folders in the host computer.

Operation list
DEVICE CHANGE
Enables a device for display on the PROGRAM FOLDER screen. When selecting the host file list of the
Data Server, press soft key [DTSVR HOST].

DNC SET
Specifies a file for DNC operation.

M198 SET
Specifies a folder for M198-based subprogram calling.

DETAIL OFF / DETAIL ON

Switches the file list information to overall display or detail display.

CREATE FOLDER
Creates a sub-folder under the current work folder.

DELETE
Deletes a file or folder.

RENAME
Renames a file or folder.

HOST CHANGE
Changes the connected host computer.

SEARCH
Searches for a file in the current folder.

GET
Transfers a file from the host computer to the Data Server.

MGET
Transfers files from the host computer to the Data Server by specifying a file name with wildcards (*, ?).

BGET
Transfers a file from the host computer to the Data Server in binary format. Use this soft key to transfer a
binary-format NC program or data other than an NC program such as NC parameter or tool data.

LIST-GET
Transfers multiple files from the host computer to the Data Server according to a list file.

READ (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-A)

F INPUT (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-B)
Inputs an NC program in the host computer to part program storage of the CNC. This soft key is enabled
only when the Data Server is in the FTP mode and EDIT mode, and parameter No. 20 is set to 5.

- 122 -
 1.OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/06 OPERATION FUNCTIONS

PUNCH (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-A)

F OUTPUT (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-B)
Outputs an NC program in part program storage of the CNC to the host computer. This soft key is
enabled only when the Data Server is in the FTP mode and EDIT mode, and parameter No. 20 is set to 5.

REFRESH
Updates the information displayed on the DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen.

NOTE
The operations of soft keys [GET], [MGET], [BGET], and [LIST-GET] are the
target operations of the memory protection key.
This means that when the memory protection key is enabled, these operations
result in a "WRITE PROTECT" error and cannot be performed.
For information about the memory protection key, refer to the CONNECTION
MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-63943EN-1) of the CNC.

1.3.1 Displaying and Operating the File List

RENAME, DETAIL OFF, DETAIL ON
The contents of the file list can be updated and displayed.

1 Press soft key [REFRESH] to update the contents of the file list.
2 Press soft key [DETAIL OFF] to display a file name only.
3 Press soft key [DETAIL ON] to display a file attribute, size, date, and file name.

NOTE
1 The information displayed with soft key [DETAIL ON] depends on the setting of
the FTP server on the host computer.
2 When a file operation is performed in the detail display mode, the rightmost
information displayed on the screen is handled as the file name. For this reason,
the file operation may not be performed correctly depending on the displayed
information or file name. In this case, set the overall display mode and perform
the file operation.
3 When many files are registered in a target folder, it may take time to display a
file list.

MOVE FOLDER
A work folder can be moved.

1 By using cursor keys , select a folder to be moved.

2 Press the MDI key .

CREATE FOLDER
A new folder can be created.

1 Move to a new folder to be created.

2 Enter a desired folder name.
3 Press soft key [CREATE FOLDER].
- 123 -
1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64014EN/06

DELETE
Specifying a file or folder
A file or folder can be deleted.

1 By using cursor keys , select a file or folder to be deleted.

2 Press soft key [DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

Specifying multiple files

Multiple files or folder can be deleted.

1 Press soft key [SELECT START].

2 By using cursor keys , select a file to be deleted.
3 Press soft key [SELECT].
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for files to be deleted.
4 Press soft key [DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

NOTE
Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.

DELETE (new procedure)

Specifying a file or folder
A file or folder can be deleted.

1 Place the cursor on the name of a file or folder to be deleted.

2 Press soft key [DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

Selecting a range
Multiple files or folders can be deleted.

1 Press soft key [SELECT].

2 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be deleted and press soft key [RANGE SELECT].
3 By using cursor keys , select a range of files to be deleted.
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
4 When you have selected a desired range, press soft key [DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

Selecting individual files or folders

Multiple files or folders can be deleted.

1 Press soft key [SELECT].

- 124 -
 1.OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/06 OPERATION FUNCTIONS
2 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be deleted and press soft key [SELECT].
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
3 Repeat step 2 for all files to be selected.
4 When you have selected desired files, press soft key [DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

NOTE
1 Delete operation of the new procedure is performed when bit 3 (PCP) of
parameter No. 11374 is set to 1 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A or bit 4 (PCB) of
parameter No. 11374 is set to 0 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-B.
2 Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.

RENAME
A file or folder can be renamed.

1 By using cursor keys , select a file or folder to be renamed.

2 Key a new file name or folder name.
3 Press soft key [RENAME].

SEARCH
In the current work folder, a file can be found.

1 Enter a desired file name.

2 Press soft key [SEARCH],

HOST CHANGE
The connected host computer can be changed.

1 Press soft key [HOST CHANGE].

The connected host number changes in the order 1 → 2 → 3 → 1.

1.3.2 File Transfer Operation

Files can be transferred from the host computer to the Data Server.

WARNING
When a file containing multiple NC programs is transferred from the host
computer to the Data Server, the file is not divided into the NC programs and the
NC programs are not registered individually on the Data Server. The NC
programs are registered as one series of NC programs.
Operating the machine after transferring a file containing multiple NC programs
is dangerous because the machine may behave unexpectedly.
Be sure to transfer a file containing one NC program.

- 125 -
1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64014EN/06

NOTE
If an error occurs, check the cause of the error according to the Item,
“ETHERNET LOG screen” in Section 2.1, “ETHERNET LOG” in Part VI,
“MAINTENANCE.”

GET
An NC program can be transferred from the host computer to the Data Server.

1 By using cursor keys , select a file to be transferred.

2 Press soft key [GET].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
3 When a file is to be transferred to the Data Server under a different file name, enter the desired
transfer destination file name before pressing soft key [GET].

NOTE
1 Files cannot sometimes be transferred depending on the operation status and
protection status.
2 Use this operation only for text format NC programs.

MGET
Multiple NC programs can be transferred from the host computer to the Data Server.

1 Enter the names of files to be transferred. Specify the names of files using wildcards (*, ?).
2 Press soft key [MGET].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

NOTE
1 Files cannot sometimes be transferred depending on the operation status and
protection status.
2 Use this operation only for text format NC programs.

BGET
A file can be transferred from the host computer to the Data Server.

1 By using cursor keys , select a file to be transferred.

2 Press soft key [BGET].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.
3 When a file is to be transferred to the Data Server under a different file name, enter the desired
transfer destination file name before pressing soft key [BGET].

- 126 -
 1.OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/06 OPERATION FUNCTIONS

NOTE
1 Files cannot sometimes be transferred depending on the operation status and
protection status.
2 When transferring binary format NC programs and NC data such as tool offset
data, be sure to use the binary format.

LIST-GET
Multiple files can be transferred from the host computer to the Data Server according to a list file.

1 By using cursor keys , select a list file.

2 Press soft key [LIST-GET].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

When execution is selected, the files are transferred from the host computer to the Data Server according
to the list file.

NOTE
Files cannot sometimes be transferred depending on the operation status and
protection status.

1.3.3 Preparations for File Operation

M198 OPE
A folder for M198-based subprogram calling can be specified.

1 Move to the folder containing a file to be called by M198-based subprogram calling.

2 Press soft key [M198 SET].

NOTE
1 No file may be able to be set, depending on the status such as operation state or
protection state.
2 This setting is valid when the operating mode of the Data Server is the FTP
mode or buffer mode.
3 The specified folder name is stored and can be used without specifying it at the
next power-on.

DNC OPE
A file used for DNC operation can be selected.

1 Move to the folder containing a file to be used for DNC operation.

2 By using cursor keys , select a file to be used for DNC operation.
3 Press soft key [DNC SET].

- 127 -
1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64014EN/06

NOTE
1 No file may be able to be set, depending on the status such as operation state or
protection state.
2 This setting is valid when the operating mode of the Data Server is the FTP
mode or buffer mode.
3 The specified file name is not stored. Accordingly, specify a file again after
turning the power off, then on again.

1.4 M198-BASED SUBPROGRAM CALL

If the Data Server is placed in the storage mode, an M198-based subprogram call can be made using an
NC program in the Data Server.
If the Data Server is placed in the FTP mode, an M198-based subprogram call can be made using an NC
program in the host computer. If the Data Server is placed in the buffer mode, an M198-based
subprogram call can be made using an NC program of the buffer mode format in the host computer.

WARNING
If you want to execute an M198-based subprogram call, be sure to make sure
that an M198 operation folder is set correctly before starting operation.
If you start operation before checking the above, an unexpected subprogram
may be executed, possibly causing damage to the tool, machine, and/or
workpiece, or injury to the user.

NOTE
1 An M198-based subprogram call cannot be executed simultaneously with NC
program input, NC program output, and DNC operation.
2 In an M198-based subprogram call, no additional M198-baesd subprogram call
can be made.
3 M198-based subprogram calls do not allow use of file names. Use a program
number to make an M198-based call.

Subprogram call in the storage mode

Procedure
1 Check that the Data Server is placed in the storage mode.
2 Set the CNC to the MEM mode.
3 Display the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen to check that an M198 operation folder is set.
4 Automatically operate the NC program including the M198 command.

Subprogram call in the FTP mode

Procedure
1 Check that the Data Server is placed in the FTP mode.
2 Set the CNC to the MEM mode.
3 Display the DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen to check that an M198 operation folder is set.
4 Automatically operate the NC program including the M198 command.

- 128 -
 1.OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/06 OPERATION FUNCTIONS

Subprogram call in the buffer mode

Procedure
1 Check that the Data Server is placed in the buffer mode.
2 Set the CNC to the MEM mode.
3 Display the DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen to check that an M198 operation folder is set.
4 Automatically operate the NC program including the M198 command.

1.5 DNC OPERATION

If the Data Server is placed in the storage mode, DNC operation can be performed using an NC program
in the Data Server.
If the Data Server is placed in the FTP mode, DNC operation can be performed using an NC program in
the host computer.
If the Data Server is placed in the buffer mode, DNC operation can be performed using an NC program of
the buffer mode format in the host computer.

WARNING
If you want to execute DNC operation, be sure to make sure that a DNC
operation file is set correctly before starting operation.
If you start operation before checking the above, an unexpected program may
be executed, possibly causing damage to the tool, machine, and/or workpiece,
or injury to the user.

NOTE
A DNC operation cannot be executed simultaneously with NC program input, NC
program output, and M198-based subprogram call.

DNC operation in the storage mode

Procedure
1 Check that the Data Server is placed in the storage mode.
2 Set the CNC to the RMT mode.
3 Display the DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen to check that a DNC operation file is set.
4 Perform a cycle start to execute DNC operation.

DNC operation in the FTP mode

Procedure
1 Check that the Data Server is placed in the FTP mode.
2 Set the CNC to the RMT mode.
3 Display the DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen to check that a DNC operation file is set.
4 Perform a cycle start to execute DNC operation.

DNC operation in the buffer mode

Procedure
1 Check that the Data Server is placed in the buffer mode.
2 Set the CNC to the RMT mode.
3 Display the DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST screen to check that a DNC operation file is set.
4 Perform a cycle start to execute DNC operation.

- 129 -
1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64014EN/06

1.6 NC PROGRAM INPUT

When the Data Server mode is the storage mode, NC programs on the Data Server can be input to part
program storage of the CNC.
When the Data Server mode is the FTP mode, NC programs on the host computer can be input to part
program storage of the CNC.
When the Data Server mode is the buffer mode, buffer mode format NC programs on the host computer
can be input to part program storage of the CNC.

CAUTION
If bit 2 (REP) of parameter No. 3201 is set to 1, when an NC program having the
same file name as an NC program to be input is already present in part program
storage, the existing NC program is overwritten.

NOTE
NC programs cannot be input simultaneously with an NC program output,
M198-based subprogram call, and DNC operation.

Procedure
1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.
2 Display the PROGRAM screen or PROGRAM FOLDER screen.
3 Press soft key [READ] ([F INPUT] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B).
4 In the key-in buffer, enter the name of a file to be input on the Data Server, and press soft key [F
SET].
When the file name on the Data Server is not set, file name "ALL-PROG.TXT" is used by default.
5 To rename the input file and input it into part program storage, enter the new file name in the key-in
buffer, and press soft key [P SET].
6 Press soft key [EXEC].
7 During inputting, "INPUT" blinks in the lower right part of the screen.

NOTE
In the buffer mode, a file specified with soft key [F SET] is treated as a file list.
Therefore, NC program input processing is performed on the assumption that
files defined in the file list are a continuous file image.

1.7 NC PROGRAM OUTPUT

When the Data Server mode is the storage mode or buffer mode, NC programs in part program storage of
the CNC can be output to the Data Server.
When the Data Server mode is the FTP mode, NC programs in part program storage of the CNC can be
output to the host computer.

NOTE
NC programs cannot be output simultaneously with an NC program input,
M198-based subprogram call, and DNC operation.

- 130 -
 1.OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
B-64014EN/06 OPERATION FUNCTIONS

Procedure
1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.
2 Display the PROGRAM screen or PROGRAM FOLDER screen.
3 Press soft key [PUNCH] ([F OUTPUT] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B).
4 In the key-in buffer, enter the name of a file to be output in part program storage, and press soft key
[P SET].
When a specific file name in part program storage is not set, all files in the foreground folder are
assumed to be output.
5 To rename the output file and output it to the Data Server, enter the new file name in the key-in
buffer, and press soft key [F SET].
When only a file in part program storage is specified, but no file name on the Data Server is
specified, a file is created with the file name used in part program storage.
6 Press soft key [EXEC].
7 During outputting, "OUTPUT" blinks in the lower right part of the screen.

NOTE
1 When neither file in part program storage nor file name on the Data Server is
specified, all files in the foreground folder are output with file name
"ALL-PROG.TXT" to the Data Server.
2 When an NC program is output in the storage mode or buffer mode, if a file with
the same name is already present on the memory card of the Data Server, an
error occurs.

- 131 -
1. OPERATING THE DATA SERVER
FUNCTIONS OPERATION B-64014EN/06

1.8 FTP SERVER FUNCTIONS

The FTP server functions allow communication with FTP clients on the host computer.

NOTE
1 Up to five FTP clients can be connected to the FTP server. Some FTP client
software products may attempt to internally connect the FTP server as two or
more FTP clients, however. For this reason, the number of FTP clients actually
connected may differ from that of FTP client applications that can be connected.
If the DataServer Explorer connection is enabled, one CNC can connect up to
ten FTP clients.
For the DataServer Explorer connection, see Section 2.7, "DATASERVER
Explorer CONNECTION," in Part II, "SPECIFICATION."
2 On the memory card on the Data Server, text files and binary files are
distinguished from each other. You can specify text (ASCII) or binary (image)
when transferring a file from the FTP client to use the file as a text or binary file.
The file attribute can be fixed to text or binary regardless of which is specified
from the FTP client according to the setting of parameter No. 929. For details,
see Section 2.2, “RELATED NC PARAMETERS” in Part III, “SETTING”.
3 The creation date and time of a folder are not managed in the Data Server. For
this reason, the creation date and time of a folder in folder information obtained
from a personal computer are January 1, 2000.
4 Since the file size is managed in units of 500 bytes on the memory card on the
Data Server, the file size in units of 500 bytes can be obtained from a personal
computer.

- 132 -
 2.OPERATING THE MACHINE
B-64014EN/06 OPERATION REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS

2 OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE

DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS
This chapter describes how to operate the machine remote diagnosis functions.

2.1 OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS

SCREEN
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft key [REMOTE DIAG] appear. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 Press soft key [REMOTE DIAG] to display the machine remote diagnosis screen.

Machine remote diagnosis screen

4 Press soft key [(OPRT)] to display available soft keys.

Display item
INQUIRY NUMBER
Displays the inquiry number indicating the machine remote diagnosis accepting server: "INQUIRY1,"
"INQUIRY2," or "INQUIRY3."
INQUIRY
Displays information for identifying the machine remote diagnosis accepting server.
RMT DIAG STATUS
Displays the status of machine remote diagnosis.

RMT DIAG TIME

Displays the time until the machine remote diagnosis status changes from "OPEN" to "CLOSE," "FORCE
CLOSING," or "ERROR."
- 133 -
2. OPERATING THE MACHINE
REMOTE DIAGNOSIS OPERATION B-64014EN/06

At each start of diagnosis, the time is accumulated from "00:00:00."

RECEIPT NUMBER
Displays the receipt number issued by the machine remote diagnosis accepting server.
ERROR NUMBER
Displays the number of an error which occurs in operation of the machine remote diagnosis functions.
AVAILABLE DEVICE
Displays the type of communication device for which the machine remote diagnosis functions can
operate.
ERROR MESSAGE
Displays the message indicating an error which occurs in operation of the machine remote diagnosis
functions.

Operation list
DIAG OPEN
Starts machine remote diagnosis.

DIAG CLOSE
Forcibly terminates machine remote diagnosis.

INQUIRY1
Selects inquiry destination 1.

INQUIRY2
Selects inquiry destination 2.

INQUIRY3
Selects inquiry destination 3.

2.1.1 Selecting an Inquiry Destination

Select an inquiry destination among inquiry destinations 1 to 3.

1 Press soft key [(OPRT)].

2 Press soft key [INQUIRY1] to select inquiry destination 1.
3 Similarly, press soft key [INQUIRY2] to select inquiry destination 2 and soft key [INQUIRY3] to
select inquiry destination 3.

2.1.2 Starting Diagnosis

Start diagnosis.

1 Press soft key [(OPRT)].

2 Press soft key [DIAG OPEN] to start diagnosis.

2.1.2.1 Diagnosis status

Status Description
--- No operation
OPEN [DIAG OPEN] was pressed.
An attempt is being made to connect the machine remote diagnosis accepting
OPENING
server.

- 134 -
 2.OPERATING THE MACHINE
B-64014EN/06 OPERATION REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS

Status Description
ACCEPTED The machine remote diagnosis accepting server accepted diagnosis.
REFUSED The machine remote diagnosis accepting server rejected diagnosis.
This message flashes in synchronization with data flowing on the communication
DIAGNOSING
line.
CLOSE The machine remote diagnosis accepting server terminated diagnosis.
[DIAG CLOSE] was pressed. After the completion of forced termination
FORCE CLOSING
processing, "---" is indicated in the RMT DIAG STATUS field.
ERROR An error occurred on the communication line.

2.1.2.2 Error numbers and error messages

Number Error message Meaning and action to be taken
1 Diagnosis is busy [DIAG OPEN] was pressed during diagnosis.
The IP address of the router may be invalid or the power to the router may be
2 Router isn’t alive off. Check whether the IP address of the router is valid and whether the power
to the router is on.
The IP address of the machine remote diagnosis accepting server may be
invalid or the machine remote diagnosis accepting server may not be
Receipt Server isn’t
3 operating. Check whether the IP address of the machine remote diagnosis
alive
accepting server is valid and whether the machine remote diagnosis accepting
server is operating.
A system error occurred.
4 System error
Check the log messages on the ETHERNET LOG screen and contact FANUC.
Invalid Inquiry A value outside the valid setting range may be set for the inquiry destination.
5
number. Check whether the correct inquiry destination is set.
6 Invalid IP Address Set the IP address according to the IP address specification format.
A value outside the valid setting range may be set for the port number.
7 Invalid PORT number
Check whether the correct port number is set.
Invalid Router IP Set the IP address of the router according to the IP address specification
8
Address format.
A communication error occurred due to a cause as listed below.
Check the network wiring and anti-noise measures.
→ The network quality degraded, data could not be received from the
personal computer with which to communicate, and the logical
9 Socket error
communication path was disconnected.
→ The software component on the personal computer with which to
communicate forcibly disconnected the logical communication path.
→ The Ethernet cable was disconnected.
An internal error related to machine remote diagnosis occurred in the CNC.
11 Invalid Request
Check the log messages on the ETHERNET LOG screen and contact FANUC.
An unrecognizable packet was received.
12 Invalid Packet
Check the log messages on the ETHERNET LOG screen and contact FANUC.
Diagnosis was [DIAG CLOSE] was pressed not during diagnosis.
13
already stopped
An attempt to receive data failed.
17 Receive error
See Number 9 and check the network wiring and anti-noise measures.
Communication with the machine remote diagnosis accepting server stopped.
19 HeartBeat timeout
See Number 9 and check the network wiring and anti-noise measures.
An attempt was failed to send a heartbeat packet for machine remote
20 HeartBeat error diagnosis.
See Number 9 and check the network wiring and anti-noise measures.

- 135 -
2. OPERATING THE MACHINE
REMOTE DIAGNOSIS OPERATION B-64014EN/06

Number Error message Meaning and action to be taken

An attempt was failed to connect the machine remote diagnosis accepting
server using the DNS function.
22 DNS error The IP address of the DNS server may be invalid or the power to the DNS
server may be off. Check whether the IP address of the DNS server is valid
and whether the power to the DNS server is on.

2.1.3 Forcibly Terminating Diagnosis

Forcibly terminate diagnosis.

1 Press soft key [(OPRT)].

2 Press soft key [DIAG CLOSE] to forcibly terminate diagnosis.

- 136 -
 3.OPERATING THE FTP FILE
B-64014EN/06 OPERATION TRANSFER FUNCTION

3 OPERATING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER

FUNCTION
This chapter describes how to operate the FTP File Transfer function.

On the PROGRAM FOLDER screen, files on the CNC memory, memory card, host computer connected
via the embedded Ethernet or host computer connected via the Fast Ethernet can be handled by selecting a
device.
In the following examples, the Fast Ethernet board is used. Operations are the same when Multi-function
Ethernet is used.

Series 30i/31i/32i–A/B, 35i–B, PMi–A

CNC memory

Memory card
Via embedded
Ethernet
File list

Without

Memory Card
Without
Memory Card

PROGRAM FOLDER screen FAST

FAST Ethernet
Ethernet Via FAST Ethernet
Board
Board Board
File list

In this manual, the method of handling files on the host computer connected via the Fast Ethernet is
described.

NOTE
The FTP file transfer function cannot perform an M198-based subprogram call or
DNC operation. To perform it, use the Data Server functions.

- 137 -
3. OPERATING THE FTP FILE
TRANSFER FUNCTION OPERATION B-64014EN/06

3.1 DEVICE CHANGE ON THE PROGRAM FOLDER SCREEN

Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Press soft key [FOLDER] to display the PROGRAM FOLDER screen. (When there is no soft keys,
press the continue key.)

PROGRAM FOLDER screen

3 Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [DEVICE CHANGE] to display the soft keys for selectable
devices.

4 When you press soft key [FTP HOST], the information displayed on the PROGRAM FOLDER
screen is changed to the contents (FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE LIST screen) of the hard disk of
the host computer to enable file operation.

- 138 -
 3.OPERATING THE FTP FILE
B-64014EN/06 OPERATION TRANSFER FUNCTION

3.2 OPERATING THE FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE LIST SCREEN

Host computer files can be operated on the FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE LIST screen.

FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE LIST screen

NOTE
A file name containing a 2-byte code used for Japanese and others may not be
displayed correctly.

Display item
CONNECT HOST
Displays the number of the host computer currently connected.

REGISTERED PROGRAM
The number of programs in the current folder.

DEVICE
Displays the current device. If the host file list of the Fast Ethernet is selected, "FTP_HOST" is indicated.

CURRENT FOLDER
Displays the work folder in the current host computer.

FILE LIST
Displays information about the files and folders in the host computer.

Operation list
DEVICE CHANGE
Enables a device for display on the PROGRAM FOLDER screen. When selecting the host file list of the
Fast Ethernet, press soft key [FTP HOST].
- 139 -
3. OPERATING THE FTP FILE
TRANSFER FUNCTION OPERATION B-64014EN/06

DETAIL OFF / DETAIL ON

Switches the file list information to overall display or detail display.

CREATE FOLDER
Creates a sub-folder under the current work folder.

DELETE
Deletes a file or folder.

RENAME
Renames a file or folder.

HOST CHANGE
Changes the connected host computer.

SEARCH
Searches for a file in the current folder.

READ (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-A)

F INPUT (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-B)
When the CNC is placed in the EDIT mode and parameter No.20 is equal 5, it is possible to input NC
programs in the host computer to program memory of the CNC.

PUNCH (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-A)

F OUTPUT (For the Series 30i/31i/32i-B)
When the CNC is placed in the EDIT mode and parameter No.20 is equal 5, it is possible to output NC
programs in program memory of the CNC to the host computer.

REFRESH
Updates the information displayed on the FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE LIST screen of the Fast
Ethernet.

3.2.1 Displaying and Operating the File List

RENAME, DETAIL OFF, DETAIL ON
The contents of the file list can be updated and displayed.

1 Press soft key [REFRESH] to update the contents of the file list.
2 Press soft key [DETAIL OFF] to display a file name only.
3 Press soft key [DETAIL ON] to display a file attribute, size, date, and file name.

NOTE
1 The information displayed with soft key [DETAIL ON] depends on the setting of
the FTP server on the host computer.
2 When a file operation is performed in the detail display mode, the rightmost
information displayed on the screen is handled as the file name. For this reason,
the file operation may not be performed correctly depending on the displayed
information or file name. In this case, set the overall display mode and perform
the file operation.

- 140 -
 3.OPERATING THE FTP FILE
B-64014EN/06 OPERATION TRANSFER FUNCTION

MOVE FOLDER
A work folder can be moved.

1 By using cursor keys , select a folder to be moved.

2 Press the MDI key .

CREATE FOLDER
A new folder can be created.

1 Move to a new folder to be created.

2 Enter a desired folder name.
3 Press soft key [CREATE FOLDER].

DELETE
Specifying a file or folder
A file or folder can be deleted.

1 By using cursor keys , select a file or folder to be deleted.

2 Press soft key [DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

Specifying multiple files

Multiple files or folder can be deleted.

1 Press soft key [SELECT START].

2 By using cursor keys , select a file to be deleted.
3 Press soft key [SELECT].
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for files to be deleted.
4 Press soft key [DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

NOTE
Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.

DELETE (new specification)

Specifying a file or folder
A file or folder can be deleted.

1 Place the cursor on the name of a file or folder to be deleted.

2 Press soft key [DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

- 141 -
3. OPERATING THE FTP FILE
TRANSFER FUNCTION OPERATION B-64014EN/06

Selecting a range
Multiple files or folders can be deleted.

1 Press soft key [SELECT].

2 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be deleted and press soft key [RANGE SELECT].
3 By using cursor keys , select a range of files to be deleted.
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
4 When you have selected a desired range, press soft key [DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

Selecting individual files or folders

Multiple files or folders can be deleted.

1 Press soft key [SELECT].

2 Place the cursor on the name of a file to be deleted and press soft key [SELECT].
A selected file is displayed in reverse video.
3 Repeat step 2 for all files to be selected.
4 When you have selected desired files, press soft key [DELETE].
• Press soft key [EXEC] for execution.
• Press soft key [CANCEL] for cancellation.

NOTE
1 Delete operation of the new specification is performed when bit 3 (PCP) of
parameter No. 11374 is set to 1 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A or bit 4 (PCB) of
parameter No. 11374 is set to 0 for the Series 30i/31i/32i-B.
2 Up to 10 files can be selected at a time.

RENAME
A file or folder can be renamed.

1 By using cursor keys , select a file or folder to be renamed.

2 Key a new file name or folder name.
3 Press soft key [RENAME].

SEARCH
In the current work folder, a file can be found.

1 Enter a desired file name.

2 Press soft key [SEARCH],

HOST CHANGE
The connected host computer can be changed.

1 Press soft key [HOST CHANGE].

The connected host number changes in the order 1 → 2 → 3 → 1.

- 142 -
 3.OPERATING THE FTP FILE
B-64014EN/06 OPERATION TRANSFER FUNCTION

3.3 NC PROGRAM INPUT

NC programs in the host computer can be input to program memory of the CNC.

CAUTION
If bit 2 of parameter No. 3201 is set to 1, when an NC program having the same
file name as an NC program to be input is already present in program memory,
the existing NC program is overwritten.

NOTE
NC programs cannot be input simultaneously with an NC program output.

Procedure
1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.
2 Display the PROGRAM screen, PROGRAM FOLDER screen or FTP TRANSFER HOST LIST
screen.
3 Press soft key [READ] ([F INPUT] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B).
4 In the key-in buffer, enter the name of a file to be input on the host computer, and press soft key [F
SET]. When the file name on the host computer is not set, file name "ALL-PROG.TXT" is used by
default.
5 To rename the input file and input it into program memory, enter the new file name in the key-in
buffer, and press soft key [P SET].
6 Press soft key [EXEC].
7 During inputting, "INPUT" blinks in the lower right part of the screen.

3.4 NC PROGRAM OUTPUT

NC programs in program memory of the CNC can be output to the host computer.

NOTE
NC programs cannot be output simultaneously with an NC program input.

Procedure
1 Place the CNC in the EDIT mode.
2 Display the PROGRAM screen, PROGRAM FOLDER screen or FTP TRANSFER HOST LIST
screen.
3 Press soft key [PUNCH] ([F OUTPUT] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B).
4 In the key-in buffer, enter the name of a file to be output in program memory, and press soft key [P
SET].
When a specific file name in program memory is not set, all files in the foreground folder are
assumed to be output.
5 To rename the output file and output it to the host computer, enter the new file name in the key-in
buffer, and press soft key [F SET].
When only a file in program memory is specified, but no file name on the host computer is specified,
a file is created with the file name used in program memory.
6 Press soft key [EXEC].
- 143 -
3. OPERATING THE FTP FILE
TRANSFER FUNCTION OPERATION B-64014EN/06

7 During outputting, "OUTPUT" blinks in the lower right part of the screen.

NOTE
When neither file in program memory nor file name on the host computer is
specified, all files in the foreground folder are output with file name
"ALL-PROG.TXT" to the host computer.

- 144 -
V. CONNECTION
B-64014EN/06 CONNECTION 1.SETTING

1 SETTING
This chapter provides information required to install a hardware option.

1.1 Series 30i/31i/32i-A

1.1.1 Specifications
Ordering information of Fast Ethernet board A02B-0303-J146
Drawing number of printed circuit board A20B-8101-0030
Applicable models Series 30i/31i/32i-A

NOTE
1 When using the Fast Ethernet board, observe the installation condition
(environmental condition inside the cabinet) of the CNC control unit where the
board is installed.
2 Even if a control unit is installed in the environment described above, the
contents on the memory card may be destroyed as a result of a operation
mistake or unexpected event. This tends to happen if the power is turned off
while accessing the memory card. An accident can occur. So, ensure that the
data on the memory card is backed up at all times.

The table below indicates the amount of heat output by the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server. For the
amount of heat output by the main CNC unit and other optional units, refer to the CONNECTION
MANUAL (HARDWARE) of the CNC.

Name Fast Ethernet Fast Data Server

Fast Ethernet board only 6W 6W
Memory card - 0.3 W (Note)
Total 6W 6.3 W

NOTE
The amount of heat output by the memory card may vary, depending on the
employment of a large-capacity card, a modification to the card specifications,
and so forth.

1.1.2 Installation
1.1.2.1 Installation on an LCD-mounted type unit
The Fast Ethernet board is installed in an optional slot of the control unit. It occupies one slot. No
restriction is imposed on installation in the optional slot.

- 147 -
1.SETTING CONNECTION B-64014EN/06

Fast Ethernet board

NOTE
1 When using the Data Server functions, install a memory card in CNH6 before
installing the board in the optional slot. While the board is installed in the optional
slot, the memory card cannot be installed/removed.
2 Use the memory card recommended by FANUC.

1.1.2.2 Installation on a stand-alone type unit

The Fast Ethernet board is installed in the optional slot of the control unit. One slot is occupied. No
restriction is imposed on installation in the optional slot.

NOTE
1 When using the Data Server functions, install a memory card in CNH6 before
installing the board in the optional slot. While the board is installed in the optional
slot, the memory card cannot be installed/removed.
2 Use the memory card recommended by FANUC.

- 148 -
B-64014EN/06 CONNECTION 1.SETTING

1.1.2.3 Total connection diagram

Fast Ethernet board

Memory card
CNH6

CD38R
1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX+
HUB
4
5
6 RX-
7
8

1.1.2.4 Installing a memory card

The following shows the specifications of memory cards recommended as an external storage device of
the Fast Ethernet board.

Specification Capacity Remarks

A02B-0281-K601 128MB Compact Flash card
A02B-0213-K211 256MB Compact Flash card
A02B-0213-K212 1GB Compact Flash card
A02B-0213-K213 2GB Compact Flash card
A02B-0213-K214 4GB Compact Flash card

For adapters that convert data on the above Compact Flash cards to that for an ATA card, the operation of
the following adapters has been confirmed: FANUC adapter A02B-0236-K150 and Sandisk adapters
SDCF-31-03 and SDAD-38-J60.

NOTE
1 Use a FANUC-recommended memory card for the Data Server.
Follow the instructions described in “Note for using this card” supplied with a
memory card.
2 For latest information, refer to the Technical Report provided separately.

- 149 -
1.SETTING CONNECTION B-64014EN/06

Installing a memory card

1 Remove the screws of (1) and (2) for securing the stopper plate.

(1)

(2)

2 Remove the stopper plate, then insert the memory card into the connector.
MEMORY
Card

3 Secure the memory card with the stopper plate and tighten the screws of (1) and (2) for securing the
stopper plate.

(1)
MEMORY
Card

(2)

- 150 -
B-64014EN/06 CONNECTION 1.SETTING

1.2 Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B AND Power Motion i-A

1.2.1 Specifications
In case of using the Ethernet function, specify the control unit with Multi-function Ethernet
(LCD-mounted type CNC) or the Fast Ethernet board.
In case of using the Data Server function, specify the Fast Ethernet board.
Ordering information of Fast Ethernet board A02B-0323-J147
Drawing number of printed circuit board A20B-8101-0770
Applicable models Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B and Power Motion i-A

NOTE
1 Refer to the order list of each CNC, for ordering information for Multi-function
Ethernet.
2 When using the optional board, observe the installation condition (environmental
condition inside the cabinet) of the CNC control unit where the board is installed.
3 Even if a control unit is installed in the environment described above, the
contents on the Compact Flash card may be destroyed as a result of a operation
mistake or unexpected event. This tends to happen if the power is turned off
while accessing the Compact Flash card. An accident can occur. So, ensure that
the data on the Compact Flash card is backed up at all times.

The table below indicates the amount of heat output by the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server. For the
amount of heat output by the main CNC unit and other optional units, refer to the CONNECTION
MANUAL (HARDWARE) of the CNC.
Name Fast Ethernet Fast Data Server
Fast Ethernet board only 3W 3W
Compact Flash card － 0.3W (Note 2)
Total 3W 3.3W

NOTE
1 For the control unit with Multi-function Ethernet (LCD mounted type CNC), refer
to the CONNECTION MANUAL of the CNC.
2 The amount of heat output by the Compact Flash card may vary, depending on
the employment of a large-capacity card, a modification to the card
specifications, and so forth.

- 151 -
1.SETTING CONNECTION B-64014EN/06

1.2.2 Installation

1.2.2.1 Installation on an LCD-mounted type unit

For the control unit with Multi-function Ethernet, the printed circuit board of Fast Ethernet is installed on
the main board.

Rear of unit

Multi-function Ethernet

The Fast Ethernet board is installed in an optional slot of the control unit. It occupies one slot. No
restriction is imposed on installation in the optional slot.

Fast Ethernet board

NOTE
1 When using the Data Server functions, install a Compact Flash card in CD58
before installing the board in the optional slot. While the board is installed in the
optional slot, the Compact Flash card cannot be installed/removed.
2 For the Data Server for the Series 30i/31i/32i-B, directly install a Compact Flash
card.
It is not necessary to use an adapter which converts data for that for an ATA
card (A02B-0236-K150).
3 Use the Compact Flash card recommended by FANUC.

- 152 -
B-64014EN/06 CONNECTION 1.SETTING

1.2.2.2 Installation on a stand-alone type unit

The Fast Ethernet board is installed in the optional slot of the control unit. One slot is occupied. No
restriction is imposed on installation in the optional slot.

NOTE
1 When using the Data Server functions, install a Compact Flash card in CD58
before installing the board in the optional slot. While the board is installed in the
optional slot, the Compact Flash card cannot be installed/removed.
2 For the Data Server for the Series 30i/31i/32i-B, directly install a Compact Flash
card.
It is not necessary to use an adapter which converts data for that for an ATA
card (A02B-0236-K150).
3 Use the Compact Flash card recommended by FANUC.

- 153 -
1.SETTING CONNECTION B-64014EN/06

1.2.2.3 Total connection diagram

Fast Ethernet board

Compact Flash
CD58 card

CD38
1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX+ HUB
4
5
6 RX-
7
8

1.2.2.4 Installing a memory card

The following shows the specifications of memory cards recommended as an external storage device of
the Fast Ethernet board.
Specification Capacity Remarks
A02B-0281-K601 128MB Compact Flash card
A02B-0213-K211 256MB Compact Flash card
A02B-0213-K212 1GB Compact Flash card
A02B-0213-K213 2GB Compact Flash card
A02B-0213-K214 4GB Compact Flash card

NOTE
1 Use a FANUC-recommended memory card for the Data Server.
Follow the instructions described in “Note for using this card” supplied with a
memory card.
2 For latest information, refer to the Technical Report provided separately.

- 154 -
B-64014EN/06 CONNECTION 1.SETTING

Installing a Compact Flash card

1 Remove the cover (put up the tip of cover), as shown below.

CD58

2 Insert the Compact Flash card to CD58.

CD58
Flash card
Compact

3 The cover is matched to the guide and set on. As a result, the Compact Flash card is fixed.

Guide
CD58

Guide

- 155 -
2.CABLE CONNECTION CONNECTION B-64014EN/06

2 CABLE CONNECTION
This section describes information relating to the physical Ethernet connection.

CAUTION
1 Before connecting or disconnecting the cable to or from the hardware option,
make sure that the power to the CNC is turned off.
2 Please inquire of each manufacturer about the construction of network or the
condition of using the equipment except the hardware option (hub, transceiver,
cable etc.). When configuring your network, you must take other sources of
electrical noise into consideration to prevent your network from being influenced
by electrical noise. Make sure that network wiring is sufficiently separated from
power lines and other sources of electrical noise such as motors, and ground
each of the devices as necessary. Also, a high and insufficient ground
impedance may cause interference during communications. After installing the
machine, conduct a communications test before you actually start operating the
machine.
We cannot ensure operation that is influenced by network trouble caused by a
device other than the hardware option.

2.1 CONNECTING TO Ethernet

The Fast Ethernet or hardware option is provided with a 100BASE-TX interface.
Prepare a hub for connecting the Fast Ethernet board to the Ethernet trunk. The following shows an
example of a general connection.

HUB

:
:
:
Twiste d pair
cable

CNC
Hardware
option

Max. 100m

- 156 -
B-64014EN/06 CONNECTION 2.CABLE CONNECTION

NOTE
1 The cable can be up to 100 m long (for the FANUC- recommended cable for
movable sections, up to 50 m). Do not make the cable longer than necessary.
2 An Ethernet cable needs clamping to make system operation stable. For details
of clamping, see Subsection 2.5.2, “Cable Clamp and Shield Processing”. The
clamp for grounding the shield of the cable can also fix the cable.

Control unit

Ethernet cable

Clamp

Grounding plate

3 Some of the units (hub, transceiver, etc.) required to build a network are not
dust-proof. They should be enclosed in a dust-proof cabinet. Using them in an
atmosphere with dust or oil mist may lead to a communication error or failure.

2.2 LEADING OUT THE Ethernet CABLE

(1) LCD-mounted type
Select the control unit with Multi-function Ethernet or Fast Ethernet board. For the location of the
connector, see Subsection 1.1.1 or 1.2.1, “Component Layout”, in Part VI, “MAINTENANCE”.
Fast Ethernet board
(CD38R)

Twisted-pair cable
The radius of the cable
must be 70 mm or more.
Clamp

Ground plate Control unit with

Multi-function Ethernet
(CD38B)

- 157 -
2.CABLE CONNECTION CONNECTION B-64014EN/06

(2) Stand-alone type

Select the Fast Ethernet board. For the location of the connector, see Subsection 1.1.1 or 1.2.1,
“Component Layout”, in Part VI, “MAINTENANCE”.

The radius of the cable

must be 70 mm or more.

Twisted-pair cable

Clamp

Ground plate

2.3 RJ-45 CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS

Pin No. Signal name Description
1 TX+ Send +
2 TX- Send -
3 RX+ Receive +
4 Not used
5 Not used
6 RX- Receive -
7 Not used
8 Not used

- 158 -
B-64014EN/06 CONNECTION 2.CABLE CONNECTION

2.4 TWISTED-PAIR CABLE SPECIFICATION

2.4.1 Cable Connection

The cable used for connection between the 100BASE-TX interface, CD38R, of the Ethernet board/Data
Server board and the hub is connected as follows:
Hardware option
HUB
CD38
1 TX+ RJ-45 1 TX+
2 TX- modular connector 2 TX-
3 RX+ 3 RX+
4 4
5 5
6 RX- 6 RX-
7 7
8 MAX.100m 8

TX+ (1) (1) TX+

TX- (2) (2) TX-

RX+ (3) (3) RX+

RX- (6) (6) RX-

Shielded cable

• Keep the total cable length within 100 m.

Do not extend the cable more than is necessary.
• The figure above shows the cable connection when cables are crossed in the hub.
"X" is usually indicated at the port of the hub to signify that cables are crossed in the hub.
Hardware option HUB
Cross-connected
X cables
1 TX+ TX+ 1
2 TX- TX- 2
3 RX+ RX+ 3
6 RX- RX- 6

2.4.2 Cable Materials

CAUTION
Unshielded cable (UTP cable) is commercially available as 100BASE-TX
twisted-pair cable: You should, however, use shielded Category 5 twisted-pair
cable (STP cable) to improve the resistance to electrical noise in an FA
environment.

Recommended cables
Manufacturer Specification Remarks
FURUKAWA ELECTRIC CO., LTD. DTS5087C-4P Twisted-pair cable
- 159 -
2.CABLE CONNECTION CONNECTION B-64014EN/06

Manufacturer Specification Remarks

NISSEI ELECTRIC CO., LTD. F-4PFWMF Single-conductor cable

Inquiries
Manufacturer Contact address
FURUKAWA ELECTRIC CO., LTD. 2-6-1 Marunouchi, Chiyoda-ku. Tokyo 100-8322
Sales Headquarters TEL: 03-3286-3126 FAX: 03-3286-3979
Remarks
NISSEI ELECTRIC CO., LTD. 3F MU Bldg., 1-9-1 Minami-narise,
Machida Branch Machida City, Tokyo 194-0045
TEL: 0427-29-2531 FAX: 0427-29-3375
Overseas Sales Office IWATANI International Corporation
Tokyo Head Office
21-8 Nishi-shinbashi 3-chome, Minato-ku, TOKYO,
105-8458, JAPAN
TEL: 03-5405-5810 FAX: 03-5405-5666
Telex: 2524256 IWATYO J
Remarks A finished cable with connectors at both ends can be
offered.

NOTE
The above recommended cables cannot be connected to moving parts.

Recommended cable (for movable parts)

Manufacturer Specification Remarks
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. AWG26 4P TPMC-C5-F(SB) Dedicated to
Shinko Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. FNC-118 FANUC

Specification
• Electric characteristics:
Conforms to EIA/TIA 568A Category 3 and Category 5.
From the viewpoint of attenuation performance, ensure that the length to the hub is 50 m or less.
• Structure:
Group shielded (braided shield). A drain wire is available.
The conductor is an AWG26 annealed copper twisted wire, with a sheath thickness of 0.8 mm and
an outer diameter of 6.7 mm ±0.3 mm.
• Fire retardancy
UL1581 VW-1
• Oil resistance
Conforms to the FANUC internal standards (equivalent to the conventional oil-resistant electric
cables).
• Flexing resistance:
1,000,000 times or more with a bending radius of 50 mm (U-shaped flex test)
• UL style No.
AWM 20276 (80°C/30V/VW-1)

NOTE
Be sure to use the connector TM21CP-88P(03) manufactured by HIROSE
ELECTRIC CO., LTD. for this cable.

- 160 -
B-64014EN/06 CONNECTION 2.CABLE CONNECTION
Inquiries
Manufacturer Contact address Remarks
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. Nagano Sales Office TEL:0266-27-1597
Shinko Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Tokyo Sales Office TEL:03-3492-0073

Cable assembly
Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd. can also supply the cable assembly mentioned above.
Contact Oki Electric directly to determine the specifications (length, factory test, packing, and so
forth) for purchase.

2.4.3 Connector Specification

Use an 8-pin modular connector (RJ-45) with the twisted-pair cable for the Ethernet connection. The
following connector must be used.

Specification Manufacturer Remarks

TM21CP-88P(03) HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD. Note

NOTE
Information about TM21CP-88P(03):
Connector (standard product of the manufacturer)
Drawing number: A63L-0001-0823#P
Manufacturer: HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
Manufacturer type number: TM21CP-88P(03)
Conforms to EIA/TIA 568A Category 3 and Category 5.
For assembly with a cable, contact HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD. directly.
(From HIROSE ELECTRIC CO., LTD., "TM21CP-88P(03) Connection Procedure
Manual (Technical Specification No. ATAD-E2367)" is available as a technical
document.)

2.5 ELECTRICAL NOISE COUNTERMEASURES

2.5.1 Separating Signal Lines

For signal line separation, refer to the description of noise protection in the Connection Manual
(Hardware) of CNC. The wiring for the Ethernet cable is of group C.

2.5.2 Clamping and Shielding Cables

Clamp an Ethernet twisted pair cable according to the method described below, as with cables that need
to be shielded. Clamping cables provides support and shielding and is extremely important to the safe
operation of the system. Never overlook cable clamping.
Peel off part of the jacket as shown in the figure to expose the outer coating of the shield, and press this outer
coating against the ground plate with the clamp fixture.
The machine manufacturer must prepare the ground plate and install it as follows:

- 161 -
2.CABLE CONNECTION CONNECTION B-64014EN/06

Ground plate

Cable

Cable clamp

Ground plate

Shield

Peel off jacket

NOTE
To ensure the safe operation of the system, clamp and shield the cables.

Connect the Ethernet board and hub with a twisted-pair cable. Shield the cable with clamp fixtures.
This shielding is extremely important to the stable operation of the system. Be sure to shield the cable.
Shield both ends of each cable at locations as nearest to the CNC and hub connectors as possible. When
the CNC and hub are contained in the same power magnetics cabinet and the cable is short, shield the
cable only at the hub side.

- 162 -
B-64014EN/06 CONNECTION 2.CABLE CONNECTION

Power magnetics cabinet Power magnetics cabinet

Control unit Control unit

Twisted-pair
cable

HUB

Shielding

Example of shielding of transceiver cable

(When LCD-mounted type Series 30i-A)

Prepare the following earth plate.

Mounting screw hole

Ground terminal
(used for grounding)
Clamp fixture
mounting hole

Use a nickel-plated iron plate at least 2 mm thick as the ground plate.

8mm Ground plate

12mm

20mm

Details of clamp fixture mounting holes

- 163 -
2.CABLE CONNECTION CONNECTION B-64014EN/06

55mm max.

28mm

6mm

17mm

External dimensions of clamp fixture

2.5.3 Grounding the Network

Even if the grounding condition on the machine side is satisfied, the communication line can pick up
noise from the machine, depending on the machine installation condition and environment, thus resulting
in a communication error. To protect against such noise, the machine should be separated and insulated
from the Ethernet trunk cable and personal computer. Examples of connection are given below.
Personal computer
Switching HUB

Note 2

Note 1

Hub power supply

Note 2 Note 2
Personal computer / HUB HUB
HUB side
Electrically separated
by 100BASE-TX cable STP cable STP
connection cable
Machine system
Ethernet Machine Machine
Note 1 Note 1 Note 1
Machine

Note 1 Note 1 Note 1

Large-Scale Network

- 164 -
B-64014EN/06 CONNECTION 2.CABLE CONNECTION

Personal computer
Hub power supply
Note 2
HUB
Note 1
Note 1
Personal computer/Ethernet trunk side
Electrically separated
by 100BASE-TX STP cable
cable connection
Machine system
Ethernet
Note 1
Machine

Note 1

Small-Scale Network

NOTE
1 The ground between PC/HUB side and machine system side must be separated.
If it is impossible to separate the ground because there is only one grounding
point, connect the ground cable for each system to the grounding point
independently. (See figure below.)
The resistance for grounding must be less than 100-ohm (Class D). The
thickness of the ground cable is the same as the thickness of AC power cable or
more. At least thickness of 5.5mm2 is necessary.
2 Note that the number of allowable hub-to-hub connections depends on the type
of hub.
3 There is possibility that noise makes the obstacle of communication even if the
ground is separated using the 100BASE-TX. In the case of using the Fast
Ethernet/Fast Data Server under the worst environment, please separate
between the PC/Trunk line side and machine system side completely using the
100BASE-FX (Optical fiber media).

- 165 -
2.CABLE CONNECTION CONNECTION B-64014EN/06

FG

Note 2

HUB

Ground wire on personal

computer and trunk sides
Ground wire on
machine system

Machine
Ground wire on machine system

Ground point

Wiring on a single ground point

2.6 CHECK ITEMS AT INSTALLATION

The following table lists check items at installation.

Check item Description Check

Ethernet cable
Use cables which satisfies all the following conditions:
1) With shielding
Type
2) Twisted-pair cable
3) Category 5
The cable length shall be within 100 m (50 m for a movable cable recommended
Length
by FANUC).
For a twisted-pair cable, the following pins shall be paired:
Connection 1) Pin No. 1 (TX+) – pin No. 2 (TX-)
2) Pin No. 3 (RX+) – pin No. 6 (RX-)
The Ethernet cables shall be bound separately from the following cables or
covered with an electromagnetic shield:
Separation
1) Group A: AC power lines, power lines for motors, and others
2) Group B: DC power lines (24 VDC) and others
For a shielded cable, the part of which outer coating is peeled off and exposed
Shielding
shall be fixed to the ground plate with a clamp fixture.
The ground plate shall be located as nearest to the CNC as possible (to make the
Clamping
cable between the ground plate and CNC hard to be affected by noise).
Connectors Any cable connector shall not be pulled (to prevent poor contact of the connector).
Wiring No cable shall be laid under a heavy object.
The bending radius shall be at least four times as long as the diameter of the
Bending radius
cable.
For movable
For a movable part, a cable for a movable part shall be used.
part

- 166 -
B-64014EN/06 CONNECTION 2.CABLE CONNECTION

Check item Description Check

CNC and cabinet
The CNC ground (frame ground) shall be connected properly and the length of the
CNC grounding
ground wire shall be within 300 mm.
Ground plate The ground plate shall be connected to the AC ground of the cabinet with wire.
Mounting The Fast Ethernet board shall be inserted in a CNC slot properly.
HUB
The "cautions on use" of the hub shall be observed (A terminating resistor shall be
Use conditions
mounted properly if required).
Grounding The hub shall be grounded.
Cabinet The hub shall be installed in an enclosed cabinet.
Vibration The hub shall be installed so that it is not affected by vibration.
The bending radius shall be at least four times as long as the diameter of the
Bending radius
cable.

- 167 -
VI. MAINTENANCE
 1.HARDWARE MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/06 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

1 HARDWARE MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
This chapter provides hardware maintenance information related to the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server.

1.1 Series 30i/31i/32i-A

1.1.1 Component Layout

CNH6

CD38R

Name PCB drawing No. Remarks

Fast Ethernet board A20B-8101-0030

- 171 -
1. HARDWARE MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION MAINTENANCE B-64014EN/06

1.1.2 LED Indications and Meanings

The Fast Ethernet board provides four green LEDs (STATUS) and one red LED (ALARM) for status
indication, and provides three green LEDs and one red LED for communication status indication. The
figure below shows the locations of these LEDs. The table below explains the LED lighting states.
In the following explanations, the LED lighting states are expressed as follows:

†: Off „: On œ: Blinking

CD38R
ALR (RED)
COM (YELLOW)

LIL (GREEN)
COL (RED)
BTX (GREEN)
4(STASUS) (GREEN)
3(STATUS) (GREEN)

2(STATUS) (GREEN)
1(STATUS) (GREEN)

NOTE
The face plate is indicated using dotted lines.

LED display transition for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (during power-on)
LED display
Status Meaning
L4 L3 L2 L1
†††† Power-off
Initial state entered immediately after power-on.
If the Fast Ethernet board is stopped in this condition, the cause is one of
Immediately after
„„„„ the following:
power-on
→ The software is not stored in the Flash ROM of the CNC.
→ The Fast Ethernet board is defective.
The Fast Ethernet board has started.
Start of Fast Ethernet
„„„† If the Fast Ethernet board is stopped in this condition, the Fast Ethernet
board
board may be defective.
The software has been downloaded to the Fast Ethernet board.
Completion of
„„†† If the Fast Ethernet board is stopped in this condition, the Fast Ethernet
software downloading
board may be defective.
The software OS has started.
If the Fast Ethernet board is stopped in this condition, the cause is one of
„††† Firmware OS started. the following:
→ The software stored in the Flash ROM of the CNC is destroyed.
→ The Fast Ethernet board is defective.
Initialization of the software OS is completed.
Completion of If the Fast Ethernet board is stopped in this condition, the cause is one of
†„„„ software OS the following:
initialization → The software stored in the Flash ROM of the CNC is destroyed.
→ The Fast Ethernet board is defective.
- 172 -
 1.HARDWARE MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/06 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

LED display
Status Meaning
L4 L3 L2 L1
†„„œ The Ethernet parameters have been read.
If the Fast Ethernet board is stopped in this condition, the cause is one of
Completion of the following:
parameter reading → The Ethernet function option (S707) or Data Server function option
(S737) is not installed.
→ The IP address or subnet mask is not set.
†††œ Start completion The Fast Ethernet board has started normally.

LED display for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (during normal operation)
LED display
Status Meaning
L4 L3 L2 L1
†††œ Normal status The board is operating normally.

LED display for BTX, LIL, COM, and ALM (during normal operation)
LED display Status Meaning
BTX „ 100BASE-TX connection in progress The communication rate is 100BASE-TX.
BTX † 10BASE-T connection in progress The communication rate is 10BASE-T.
LIL „ Connected to hub The board is connected to the hub.
COM „ Transmission/reception in progress Data is being transmitted or received.
ALM † No alarm No alarm is issued

LED display for LED1, LED2, LED3, and LED4 (when abnormality occurs)
The STATUS LEDs are turned on and off repeatedly with long on-time and short on-time.

LED display LED display

[Long on-time] [Short on-time] Status Description
4321 4321
Error on another A defect on another board or a problem on another
„„†† †††„
board board was detected.
Software has a problem, or the Fast Ethernet board
„„†† ††„† Bus error
is defective.
„„†† ††„„ Parity alarm The Fast Ethernet board is defective.
Illegal general Software has a problem, or the Fast Ethernet board
„†„† ††††
instruction is defective.
Illegal slot Software has a problem, or the Fast Ethernet board
„†„† †††„
instruction is defective.
CPU address Software has a problem, or the Fast Ethernet board
„†„† †„††
error is defective.

NOTE
If an error occurs with the LEDs turned on and off with long on-time and short
on-time in a manner not indicated above, contact FANUC.

LED display for COL, LIL, and ALM (when abnormality occurs)
LED display Status Description
In the half duplex communication mode, the COL LED is on or blinks at
COL ■ Collision occurs. short intervals if traffic of Ethernet communication is high or ambient
COL ☆ (Data collision occurs.) noise is high.
In the full duplex communication mode, the COL LED does not light.
The board is not connected to the hub properly. The LIL LED stays off
LIL □ Not connected to hub also when the power to the hub is off.
Check whether the board is connected to the hub properly.
- 173 -
1. HARDWARE MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION MAINTENANCE B-64014EN/06

LED display Status Description

A parity error occurred in memory on the Fast Ethernet board. The Fast
ALM ■ Parity error occurs.
Ethernet board is defective.

1.2 Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B AND Power Motion i-A

1.2.1 Component Layout

Fast Ethernet board (common to LCD-mounted type/Stand-alone type)

CD58

CD38R

Name PCB drawing No. Remarks

Fast Ethernet board A20B-8101-0770

- 174 -
 1.HARDWARE MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/06 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

Control unit with Multi-function Ethernet (LCD-mounted type)

Rear of unit

CD38B

1.2.2 LED Indications and Meanings

The board provides one green LED (STATUSF) and one yellow LED (LCOM) for status indication, and
two red LEDs (HER, COL).
The figure below shows the locations of these LEDs. The table below explains the LED lighting state.

Fast Ethernet board (common to LCD-mounted type/Stand-alone type)

CD38R
HER (red)

LCOM (yellow)

STATUSF (green)

COL (red)

NOTE
The face plate is indicated using dotted lines.

- 175 -
1. HARDWARE MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION MAINTENANCE B-64014EN/06

Control unit with Multi-function Ethernet (LCD-mounted type)

Rear of unit

StatusLED of Multi-function Ethernet

S TATUSF
LCOM
HER

COL
(red) (yellow) (green) (red)

In the following explanations, the LED lighting states are expressed as follows:
†: Off „: On œ: Blinking

LED display transition for STATUSF (during power-on)

LED display Status Meaning
† Power-off
„ Immediately after power-on Initial state entered immediately after power-on.
If the board is stopped in this condition, the cause is one of the
following:
→ The CNC communication software may not be running normally.
Check whether the communication software is installed properly.
→ The hardware option may be faulty. Replace the Fast Ethernet
board (main board when Multi-function Ethernet is used).
œ Start completion The board has started normally.

LED display for STATUSF (during normal operation)

LED display Status Meaning
œ Normal status The board is operating normally.

- 176 -
 1.HARDWARE MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/06 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

LED display for LCOM

LED display Status Meaning
† Not connected to hub The board is not connected to the hub properly.
The LED stays off also when the power to the hub is off.
Check whether the board is connected to the hub properly.
„ Connected to hub The board is connected to the hub.
œ Transmission/reception in Data is being transmitted or received.
progress

LED display for COL

LED display Status Meaning
† Normal status The board is operating normally.
„ Collision occurs. In the half duplex communication mode, this LED is on or blinks at
œ (Data collision occurs.) short intervals if traffic of Ethernet communication is high or ambient
noise is high.
In the full duplex communication mode, the LED does not light.

LED display for HER

LED display Status Meaning
† Normal status The board is operating normally.
„ Error detected in the Ethernet The cause may be the faulty Fast Ethernet board (main board when
circuit on the main board or Multi-function Ethernet is used) or a malfunction due to noise.
option board.
œ Error detected in the software

- 177 -
2. SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION MAINTENANCE B-64014EN/06

2 SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
This chapter provides software maintenance information related to the hardware option.

2.1 Ethernet LOG

A log related to the hardware option is displayed.

ETHERNET LOG screen

Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Press soft key [BOARD LOG] ([ETHER LOG] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B or Power Motion
i-A) to display the LOG screen for the hardware option. (If the soft key is not found, press the
continuous menu key.)

LOG screen

The latest log information is displayed at the top of the screen. At the right end of a log item, the
occurrence date and time of the log item is indicated. Date and time data is indicated in the format
"MMM.DD hh:mm:ss", where MMM represents a month, DD represents a day, hh represents hours, mm
represents minutes, and ss represents seconds.
The top item in the example above indicates "09:36:14 on August 7".

To clear the log information, press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [CLEAR].

By operating the LOG screen of the hardware option, log information can be displayed for each function.
(1) Soft key [ALL]
This soft key displays all log information related to the hardware option.
- 178 -
 2.SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/06 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
(2) Soft key [COMMON]
This soft key displays log information related to the parameter setting and basic communication
function of the hardware option.
(3) Soft key [FOCAS2]
This soft key displays log information related to the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.
(4) Soft key [DATA SERVER]
This soft key displays log information related to the Data Server.
(5) Soft key [REMOTE DIAG]
This soft key displays log information related to the machine remote diagnosis functions.
(6) Soft key [UNSOLI MSG]
This soft key displays log information related to the Unsolicited Messaging functions.
(7) Soft key [FTP TRANS]
This soft key displays log information related to the FTP file transfer functions.

NOTE
The Ethernet log information is stored in volatile memory and is lost when the
power to the CNC is turned off. Check the log information when an error occurs.

Error
Log message Meaning and action to be taken
number
E-0118 Error occurred while wait for FOCAS2 pdu A communication error occurred due to one of the
E-0119 following causes:
→ The network quality degraded, data could not be
received from the personal computer with which to
communicate, and the logical communication path
was disconnected.
→ The software component on the personal computer
with which to communicate forcibly disconnected the
logical communication path.
→ The Ethernet cable was disconnected.
E-011A All communication paths are busy All FOCAS2/Ethernet communication paths are being
used.
E-0126 No response from RMT DIAG server The IP address of the machine remote diagnosis
accepting server may be invalid or the power to the
machine remote diagnosis accepting server may be off.
Check whether the IP address of the machine remote
diagnosis accepting server is valid and whether the
power to the machine remote diagnosis accepting
server is on.
Alternatively, the machine remote diagnosis accepting
server may not respond to the PING command to
increase the security level (such as a firewall setting).
Set bit 1 of parameter No. 905 to 1 and connect the
server again.
E-012D No response from router The IP address of the router may be invalid or the
power to the router may be off. Check whether the IP
address of the router is valid and whether the power to
the router is on.

- 179 -
2. SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION MAINTENANCE B-64014EN/06

Error
Log message Meaning and action to be taken
number
E-0148 Cannot save parameter for Unsolicited When the FOCAS2 function “cnc_wrunsolicprm2” is
Message received, the save of parameters for the Unsolicited
Messaging function failed due to one of the following
causes:
→ The mode of the Unsolicited Messaging function isn’t
“PC MODE”.
→ The status of the Unsolicited Messaging function isn’t
“Not Ready”.
→The wrong value exists in the argument “the
parameters for the Unsolicited Messaging” of the
FOCAS2 function “cnc_wrunsolicprm2”.
E-0149 The received parameter for Unsolicited When the FOCAS2 function “cnc_wrunsolicprm2”,
Message is wrong “cnc_rdunsolicprm2” or “cnc_unsolicstart” is received, it
is detected that the argument “the parameter number of
the Unsolicited Messaging” is wrong.
E-0200 (Received message from FTP server) A message sent from the FTP server is displayed as is.
A message containing kanji, hiragana, and/or katakana
characters may not be displayed correctly.
E-0202 Connection failed with FTP server The FTP server software may not be running. Run the
FTP server software.
Alternatively, the setting may be made so that the FTP
server cannot be connected to increase the security
level (such as a firewall setting). Change the firewall
setting so that the FTP server can be connected.
E-0207 The router is not found The IP address of the router may be invalid or the
power to the router may be off. Check whether the IP
address of the router is valid and whether the power to
the router is on.
E-0208 The FTP server is not found The IP address of the FTP server may be invalid or the
power to the FTP server may be off. Check whether the
IP address of the FTP server is valid and whether the
power to the FTP server is on.
Alternatively, the FTP server may not respond to the
PING command to increase the security level (such as a
firewall setting). Set bit 1 of parameter No. 905 to 1 and
connect the server again.
E-020B Cannot login into FTP server Check the user name and password for logging in to the
FTP server.
E-020C The parameters of FTP server are wrong Check the user name and password for logging in to the
FTP server.
E-020D Changing a work folder of host failed Check the work folder for logging in to the FTP server.
E-0219 The DNC file is not found Check whether the file for DNC operation is specified
correctly.
E-021A The specified file is not found Check whether the specified file is present.
E-021B Opening a file failed The file could not be opened.
Check the error code in parentheses.
E-021F FTP transfer is busy on BUFFER mode FTP communication could not catch up with data
supply.
Correct the file division size. Alternatively, set bit 0 of
parameter No. 0904 to 1.
E-0220 There is no file in list file No file is defined in the list in the buffer mode. Correct
the file list.
E-0221 The specified file already exists The specified file is already present on the memory card
of the Data Server. Delete the existing file. Alternatively,
change the file name.

- 180 -
 2.SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/06 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
Error
Log message Meaning and action to be taken
number
E-0223 Writing data to the file failed Data could not be written to the memory card of the
Data Server. Check the error code in parentheses.
E-023A The specified file is busy The file on the memory card of the Data Server is
currently used.
When a file on the memory card is selected as a main
program, the file is regarded as being used.
E-0252 Contents of ATA card are broken Format the memory card of the Data Server.
E-02F0 ATA card is not found Check whether a memory card is installed in the Data
Server.
E-02F3 ATA card is not mounted Check whether the memory card of the Data Server is
destroyed and whether the memory card has been
formatted.
E-041A Frame transmission failed (TCP) A communication error occurred due to one of the
following causes:
→ The network quality degraded, data could not be
received from the personal computer with which to
communicate, and the logical communication path
was disconnected.
→ The software component on the personal computer
with which to communicate forcibly disconnected the
logical communication path.
→ The Ethernet cable was disconnected.
→ Data cannot be posted to the communication
destination due to a firewall setting.
E-0A02 Cannot read MAC address The MAC address may not be written on the hardware
option or the board may be damaged.
E-0A06 Network is too busy An excessive amount of data flows over the network.
Take action such as dividing the network.
E-0B00 The own IP address is wrong Set the IP address according to the IP address
specification format.
E-0B01 The own IP address is not set Set the IP address.
E-0B02 Subnet mask is wrong Set the subnet mask according to the subnet mask
specification format.
E-0B03 Subnet mask is not set Set the subnet mask.
E-0B04 Router IP address is wrong There may be a conflict between the classes of the local
node and router IP addresses.
E-0B05 IP address of DNS server is wrong There may be a conflict between the classes of the local
node and DNS server IP addresses.
E-0B06 The own host name is wrong Check the host name setting.
E-0B07 The own domain name is wrong Check the domain name setting.
E-0B08 TCP port number is wrong A value outside the valid setting range may be set.
E-0B09 UDP port number is wrong A value outside the valid setting range may be set.
E-0B0B IP address of remote FTP server is wrong Set the IP address according to the IP address
specification format.
E-0B0C Port number of a remote FTP server is A value outside the valid setting range may be set.
wrong
E-0B0D User name of remote FTP server is wrong A character unavailable for a user name may be used.
E-0B0E Password of remote FTP server is wrong A character unavailable for a password may be used.
E-0B0F Login folder of remote FTP srv is wrong A character unavailable for a login folder name may be
used.
E-0B10 Port number of own FTP server is wrong A value outside the valid setting range may be set.
E-0B11 User name of own FTP server is wrong A character unavailable for a user name may be used.
E-0B12 Password of own FTP server is wrong A character unavailable for a password may be used.
E-0B13 Login folder of own FTP server is wrong A character unavailable for a login folder name may be
used.
- 181 -
2. SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION MAINTENANCE B-64014EN/06

Error
Log message Meaning and action to be taken
number
E-0B14 IP address of Remote Diag is wrong Set the IP address of the machine remote diagnosis
accepting server according to the IP address
specification format.
E-0B15 Port number of Remote Diag is wrong A value outside the valid setting range may be set.
E-0B18 Cannot set because DHCP is available To set the item, disable the DHCP client function.
E-0B27 Unsolicited Message isn't available The software conditions to use the Unsolicited
Messaging function are not satisfied. Refer to Chapter
6, ”UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION” in Part II,
“SPECIFICATION”.
E-0B29 Mode of Unsolicited Message is wrong The FOCAS2 function “cnc_wrunsolicprm2” can't be
execute in “CNC MODE”.
E-0B2A Status of Unsolicited Message is wrong The application of parameters for the Unsolicited
Messaging function failed because the status of the
Unsolicited Messaging function is not “Not Ready”.
This error occurred due to one of the following causes
when the status is not “Not Ready”:
→ The FOCAS2 function “cnc_wrunsolicprm2”, or
“cnc_unsolicstart” is executed.
→ The soft key [APPLY] is pressed.
E-0B2B Cannot refresh param of Unsolicited The application of parameters for the Unsolicited
Message Messaging function failed due to one of the following
causes:
→ The problem of E-0B29 or E-0B2A occurred.
→ The invalid value exists in the parameters for the
Unsolicited Messaging function.
E-0B44 Invalid value exists in Transmission The non-effective value exists in “TRANSMISSION
parameter of Unsolicited Message NUMBER” or “TRANSMISSION PARAMETER
(NO.1-3)”.
E-0B45 The total of Transmission size of The total transmission size of the parameters for the
Unsolicited Message exceeds the limitation Unsolicited Messaging function exceeds the available
maximum size. Refer to Subsection 6.1.2, “Setting by
CNC screen” in Part II, “SETTING” for the available
maximum size.
E-XXXX (No message) Internal error.
Report the error number.

The meaning of the error codes indicated in error messages E-02XX are as follows:
Error code Meaning
2 The available space of the memory card of the Data Server is insufficient.
10 The specified folder cannot be found.
11 The allowable number of entries is exceeded.
12 Access to a folder was rejected.
14 The specified file cannot be found.
15 Access to a file was rejected.
19 An attempt was made to access a file being used.
22 The specified file name is illegal.
28 A TV check error was detected.
36 The specified file is already present.
37 The folder is not empty.
39 The specified folder is already present.
48 The available file size is exceeded.
74 An ISO code parity error was detected.

- 182 -
 2.SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/06 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

2.2 ETHERNET CONNECTION CONFIRMATION

By transmitting the PING command, the CNC can check that a connection is made with the
communication destination.

PING screen (connection state confirmation)

Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B or Power Motion i-A)
is displayed. (If the soft key is not found, press the continuous menu key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] then soft key [PING].

PING (CONNECT STATE) screen

4 Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [PING FTP1] to send the PING command to host 1 to which
the Data Server function is connected. Similarly, press soft key [PING FTP2] and soft key [PING
FTP3] to send the PING command to connection hosts 2 and 3, respectively.

5 Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [PING RMT1] to send the PING command to inquiry
destination 1 of the machine remote diagnosis functions. Similarly, press soft key [PING RMT2] to
send the command to inquiry destination 2 and soft key [PING RMT3] to inquiry destination 3.

- 183 -
2. SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION MAINTENANCE B-64014EN/06

The results of PING execution are as follows:

Execution results of PING

PING (SETTING) screen

Procedure
1 When sending the PING command to a desired destination, enter the destination address in
HOSTNAME (IP ADDRESS) on the PING (SETTING) screen. Moreover, set a desired execution
repeat value in REPEAT.

PING (SETTING) screen

2 After entering a host name (IP address) and repeat value, press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key
[PING EXEC] to send the PING command to the specified destination.
3 To cancel the transmission of the PING command halfway, press soft key [PING CANCEL].

- 184 -
 2.SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/06 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

2.3 COMMUNICATION STATE CONFIRMATION

The communication state of the hardware option detected by hardware can be checked.

COM STATE (SEND / RECEIVE) screen

Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B or Power Motion i-A)
is displayed. (If the soft key is not found, press the continuous menu key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] then soft key [COM STATE] to display the COM STATE screen.

COM STATE screen

Display item
Display item Description
BAUDRATE Displays the communication rate and mode.
Communication rate: 100 Mbps or 10 Mbps
Communication mode: Full duplex or Half duplex
-------- : Not connected to HUB (only for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B or
Power Motion i-A)
SEND PACKET Displays the number of sent packets.
SEND RETRYOVER Displays the number of errors detected during packet sending.
COLLISION
CARRIER SENSE LOST
NO CARRIER
FRAME LENGTH ERROR
RECEIVE PACKET Displays the number of received packets.
CRC ERROR Displays the number of errors detected during packet reception.
SHORT FRAME
LONG FRAME
ODD FRAME
OVERFLOW
PHY-LSI ERROR

- 185 -
2. SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION MAINTENANCE B-64014EN/06

Operation
To clear the number of sent packets, number of received packets, and number of errors of each type, press
soft key [(OPRT)], then soft key [CLEAR].

2.4 COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE CONFIRMATION

The operation status of software running on the hardware option can be checked.

TASK STATE screen

Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B or Power Motion i-A)
is displayed. (If the soft key is not found, press the continuous menu key.)
3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] then soft key [TASK STATE] to display the TASK STATE
screen.

TASK STATE screen

Display item
The meaning of each symbol is indicated below.
Display item Symbol and meaning Function that can be checked
COMMON W : Data being processed (1) Operation status of the basic
D : Data being processed (2) function
E : Start of software
FOCAS2 #0 C : Waiting for connection from the host Operation status of the
W : Data being processed (1) FOCAS2/Ethernet functions
D : Data being processed (2)
N : FOCAS2 incapable of being executed
FOCAS2 #1 W : Data being processed (1)
D : Data being processed (2)
X : Not executed yet

- 186 -
 2.SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/06 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

Display item Symbol and meaning Function that can be checked

FOCAS2 #2 W : Data being processed (1)
D : Data being processed (2)
X : Not executed yet

SCREEN W : Data being processed (1) Operation status of the CNC screen
D : Data being processed (2) display functions
X : Not executed yet
UDP W : Data being processed (1) Operation status of the UDP broad
D : Data being processed (2) cast
X : Not executed yet
PMC W : Data being processed (1) Operation status of the FANUC
D : Data being processed (2) LADDER-III function
X : Not executed yet
DATASERVER W : Data being processed (1) Operation status of the Data Server
D : Data being processed (2) functions
X : Not executed yet
FTP SERVER W : Data being processed (1)
D : Data being processed (2)
Number : Number of sockets currently connected
REMOTE DIAG W : Data being processed (1) Operation status of the machine
D : Data being processed (2) remote diagnosis functions
X : Not executed yet
UNSOLICITED W : Data being processed (1) Operation status of the unsolicited
D : Data being processed (2) messaging function
N : Abnormal state
X : Not executed yet
Number : The existence signals is being transmitted
during this number is being counted.
FTP W : Data being processed (1) Operation status of the FTP file
D : Data being processed (2) transfer function
X : Not executed yet
iPendant C : Waiting for connection from the host Operation status of the iPendant
(Only with the W : Data being processed (1) function
Series D : Data being processed (2)
30i/31i/32i/35i-B, X : Not executed yet
Power Motion i-A)

2.5 FTP SERVER MAINTENANCE

The state of FTP clients connected to the FTP server can be checked and the FTP connection can be
disconnected forcedly.

NOTE
To use this function, the DataServer Explorer connection option (R953) is
required.

FTP Server MAINTENANCE screen (CLIENT LIST, CLIENT DETAIL)

Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft key [ETHER BOARD] ([ETHER NET] for the Series 30i/31i/32i-B) is displayed. (If the soft
key is not found, press the continuous menu key.)

- 187 -
2. SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION MAINTENANCE B-64014EN/06

3 Press soft key [ETHER BOARD] then soft key [FTP SERVER] to display the FTP Server
MAINTENANCE screen (CLIENT LIST).

FTP Server MAINTENANCE screen (CLIENT LIST)

4 By using cursor keys , select a client, and press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key
[DETAIL] to display the FTP Server MAINTENANCE screen (CLIENT DETAIL) displaying the
client information on the cursor.

The CLIENT DETAIL screen is as follows:

FTP Server MAINTENANCE screen (CLIENT DETAIL)

5 Press soft key [LIST] to display the CLIENT LIST screen again.

- 188 -
 2.SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/06 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

Display item
Item Description
CLIENT Displays the IP address of the FTP client connected to the FTP server. (Example of
display format: "192.168.0.200")
- In the CLIENT DETAIL screen:
When the FTP connection is disconnected, "Disconnected" is displayed.
CONNECT TIME Display the connect time of the FTP client connected to the FTP server. The format
of the time is "hh:mm:ss" (hh: hour, mm: minute, ss: second).
The time display is updated automatically.
- In the CLIENT DETAIL screen:
When the FTP connection is disconnected, "--:--:--" is displayed.

NOTE
1 The CLIENT DETAIL screen cannot be displayed when any client does not exist
on the CLIENT LIST screen.
2 There is not the CLIENT DETAIL screen for 15-inch display unit.

Operation (DISCONNECT)
The selected client is disconnected on the CLIENT LIST screen and the CLIENT DETAIL screen.

1 When the CLIENT LIST screen is displayed, by using cursor keys , select a client to be
disconnected.
2 Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [DISCONNECT].

3 Press soft key [EXEC] to disconnect the selected client.

When the CLIENT DETAIL screen is displayed, the displaying client is disconnected.

NOTE
An error occurs if the disconnect operation is attempted to execute when any
client does not exist on the CLIENT LIST screen, or when the connection with
the client is already disconnected on the CLIENT DETAIL screen.

Operation (ALL DISCONNECT)

All clients are disconnected on the CLIENT LIST screen.

1 Press soft key [(OPRT)] then soft key [ALL DISCON].

2 Press soft key [EXEC] to disconnect all clients.

NOTE
1 This operation can be executed only on the CLIENT LIST screen.
2 An error occurs if this operation is attempted to execute when any client does
not exist on the CLIENT LIST screen.

- 189 -
2. SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION MAINTENANCE B-64014EN/06

2.6 ALARM AND DIAGNOSIS DATA

NOTE
This function is valid only for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B or Power Motion i-A.

When using the hardware option on the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B or Power Motion i-A, the following
alarms might be displayed.
In this case, please confirm the diagnosis data and take the countermeasure.

Number Message Description

PW0050 POWER MUST BE OFF (INITIALIZED When the power was turned on, the hardware option
(NOTE) COMMUNICATION) was initialized. Turn the power off, then on again to
enable the communication function.
SR2038 WRONG COMMUNICATION COMBINATION The combination of the hardware option and
communication function is invalid.
Details of an illegal combination are notified to
diagnosis data Nos.4400 and 4401.

NOTE
Alarm PW0050 may be issued when a Fast Ethernet board is added or replaced
or when the power is turned on after a communication function software option is
changed.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Diagnosis 4400 BD4 BD3 BD2 BD1 MFE
When an alarm SR2038 occurs, the detail information of wrong hardware option is
indicated.
#0 MFE Multi-function Ethernet
#2 BD1 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot1
#3 BD2 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot2
#4 BD3 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot3
#5 BD4 Fast Ethernet board mounted in slot4

NOTE
When an alarm SR2038 does not occur, all bits are "0".

Diagnosis 4401 Detailed number of alarm SR2038

When an alarm SR2038 occurs, the information is indicated.

Number Description
0 The combination of the hardware option and communication function is correct.
1 The number of mounted the hardware option exceeds limitation.
The number of the hardware options that can be mounted is up to three.
2 The hardware option that diagnosis data No.4400 indicates doesn't exist.
Confirm the hardware option specified for parameter Nos.970 to 973, 975, and 976.
3 In the hardware option that diagnosis data No.4400 indicates, the working
communication function is not specified.
Parameter Nos.970 to 973, 975, and 976 are wrong though the hardware option
exists.
Specify "-1" for parameter Nos.970 to 973, 975, and 976 When not using it.

- 190 -
 2.SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
B-64014EN/06 MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

Number Description
4 In the hardware option that diagnosis data No. 4400 indicates, two or more of Data
Server functions, FL-net functions, EtherNet/IP functions, and PROFINET functions
are specified simultaneously.
The Data Server functions, FL-net functions, EtherNet/IP functions, and PROFINET
functions are mutually exclusive. Specify parameters Nos. 970 to 973, 975, and 976
so that these communication functions operate in different hardware options.
5 In the hardware option that diagnosis data No.4400 indicates, a software option of
necessary communication function is not effective. For parameter No. 970, the
hardware option specified for parameter Nos. 971, 972, or 973 is specified.
Alternatively, a hardware option is specified for parameter No. 970 and parameter
No. 975 is set to ”10”, ”20”, or ”30”.
6 In the hardware option that diagnosis data No.4400 indicates, a software option of
necessary communication function is not effective.

NOTE
Set parameters Nos. 971 to 973, 975, and 976 to use Industrial
Ethernet (FL-net functions, EtherNet/IP functions, and PROFINET
functions).
To use Industrial Ethernet, refer to the relevant connection manual
listed in Section 1.2, "COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS
OPERATING ON HARDWARE OPTIONS" in Part II,
"SPECIFICATION".

2.7 COMMUNICATION RETRY MONITORING FUNCTION

When the Fast Ethernet function on the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B or Power Motion i-A is used, Fast
Ethernet communication errors are checked at intervals of 10 seconds. If the number of errors detected
during the last 1 minute reaches the value set for parameter No. 11533, warning signal WETF is output.
Since the number of detected errors is checked at intervals of 10 seconds, the warning signal is also
output at intervals of 10 seconds. The signal output is reset by turning the power off, then on again.

NOTE
1 This function is valid only for the Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B or Power Motion i-A.
2 The maximum value for network error counters is 65535.
If an overflow occurs, no warning is issued and the error count returns to 0.

Parameter
11533 Warning value for the number of fast Ethernet error detection occurrences

[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] Number of detection occurrences/minute
[Valid data range] 0 to 128
Recommended setting = 0
Set a warning value for the number of Fast Ethernet error detection occurrences.
When the number of 1- minute error detection occurrences becomes higher than or equal
to the setting, the warning signal is output.
If the setting is 0, monitoring is performed on a 10 occurrences/minute basis.

- 191 -
2. SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION MAINTENANCE B-64014EN/06

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

Fast Ethernet communication abnormality warning signal WETF<F0535.5>

[Classification] Output signal
[Operation] This signal is output when a warning occurs.
[Function] If the total number of various errors detected by the communication hardware of the Fast
Ethernet function is equal to or greater than the setting of parameter No. 11533 (standard
setting 0, which means 10 retries per one minute), this signal is set to 1.
Once this signal is set to 1, the value is kept until the CNC power is turned off.

- 192 -
APPENDIX
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX A.TROUBLESHOOTING

A TROUBLESHOOTING
This appendix describes troubleshooting related to hardware option communication.

A.1 CHECKING COMMUNICATION WITH A HUB

(1) Make sure that the STP cable between the hub and the hardware option is connected.
(2) Make sure that cables are properly wired.
• Though communication is carried out when the cable pair at the send and receive sides is not
properly mounted, communications errors may occur more frequently.
(3) Make sure that a hub for 100BASE-TX is used.
• A hub for 10BASE-T may be used to perform communication. In this case, however, the
communication speed can decrease.
(4) Make sure that the LIL LED for the Series 30i/31i/32i-A or LCOM LED for the Series
30i/31i/32i/35i-B or Power Motion i-A on the hardware option is lit at all times.
• The LIL LED will not light if the hardware option is not connected to the hub or if the hub is
not ON.
(5) Make sure that the LED (LINK indicator LED) on the connected hub is lit at all times.
• Some hubs do not have a LINK indicator LED.
• The LINK indicator LED will not light if the hub is not connected to the hardware option or the
CNC is not ON.
(6) Make sure that a hub for full duplex communication only is not used.
• The hardware option automatically detects the communication speed and communication mode
(full duplex or half duplex) by using the auto negotiation function. In communication with a
hub that does not have the auto negotiation function, the hardware option recognizes the
communication speed correctly but regards the communication mode as half duplex
communication.
As a result, when an attempt is made to communicate with a hub for full duplex communication
only that does not have the auto negotiation function, there is a discrepancy in communication
mode, so correct communication cannot sometimes be performed.

• For details on how to connect, see Part V "CONNECTION."

A.2 CHECKING SETTINGS

The following describes how to check the minimum settings needed for communications.

NOTE
For details on IP addresses, subnet mask and other set values, consult with the
network administrator.

• Checking settings on the hardware option

(1) Make sure that the MAC address of the hardware option is displayed.
- This address is appended to each board before shipment from the factory, and is
automatically displayed in the Setting screen. This address need not be set by the user.
(2) Make sure that the IP address is set.
(3) Make sure that the subnet mask is set.
(4) When a router is used, make sure that the router IP address is set.

• Checking settings on the personal computer

- 195 -
A.TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

(1) Make sure that the IP address is set.

(2) Make sure that the subnet mask is set.
(3) When a router is used, make sure that the router IP address is set.

• For details on how to set, see Part III "SETTING."

A.3 CHECKING COMMUNICATION

This section describes how to check the communication status between a CNC device and the other
communicating partner (host computer). If communication with the CNC device sometimes fails or is not
possible, first make sure that the communication path is normal by the following procedure. The "ping"
command is used to check communication.
In the following example, a host computer running the Windows XP is used.

• Checking the communication path

Open the DOS window, and enter 'ping "IP address of CNC"'. If a response is returned from the
CNC device, the Fast Ethernet/Fast Data Server is connected to the CNC device.
(1) When a response is returned (normal connection)

(2) When a response is not returned (abnormal connection)

When a response is not returned, probable causes are either the hardware connection or a
software setting, or both. Check the hardware connections and software settings again.
- 196 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX A.TROUBLESHOOTING

• Checking IP addresses for duplication

IP addresses can be checked for duplication by the procedure described below.
(1) Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the CNC device to isolate it from the network.
(2) Execute a ping command on another personal computer as described in "• Checking the
communication path."
Since the CNC device is disconnected from the network, no response should be returned. If a
response is returned, the IP address is in use on another unit. Therefore, the IP address cannot
be used on the CNC device from which the cable was disconnected.

CAUTION
The purpose of this check is to check for a duplicate IP address. It does not
assure that the IP address is left non-duplicated because a unit having the same
IP address may be turned on after the check or the same address may be set
later.
When setting an IP addressing, ask the network manager about duplication.

• Checking for influence of electrical noise

The "ping" command "-t" option is used for checking for the influence of electrical noise. This
option sends ping packets until "Ctrl+C" is pressed.

1. About the influence of electrical noise from peripheral machinery (devices)

(1) Turn the CNC is mounted ON to enable communications.
(2) Press the EMERGENCY STOP button on the machine with the servo/spindle amplifier
OFF, and issue the "ping" command from the host computer.
(3) Count the number of lost packets (packets for which a response was not returned).
If a lost packet occurs in this state, the machine is probably being affected by electrical
influence from peripheral machines.
Countermeasure:
Pin-point the source of the electrical noise, and check the wiring again to prevent
the influence of electrical noise.

2. About the influence of electrical noise from mounted machinery

(1) Start up the machine in the same way as 1 above.
(2) Cancel the emergency stop on the machine with the servo/spindle amplifier ON, and issue
the "ping" command from the host computer.
(3) Count the number of lost packets.

- 197 -
A.TROUBLESHOOTING APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

If more lost packets than in 1 above are occurring, a probable cause is the influence of
electrical noise on the machine itself. General probable causes are the state of the ground
on the machine or on the communicating party.
Countermeasure:
Check the state of the ground on the machine or on the communicating party,
and insulate the communications trunk with the machine.

• For the method of checking the operating status and communication status of the hardware option,
see Part VI “MAINTENANCE” as well.

- 198 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

B EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

This appendix describes the method of setting up an FTP server that operates on the host computer to
function as a communication destination for the Data Server functions.

NOTE
1 Before using an FTP server, completely check its operation since its behavior
may change depending on the personal computer environment.
When DNC operation is performed in the Data Server FTP mode, a
communication error may occur due to a timeout and DNC operation may be
stopped, depending on the used FTP server since the transfer rate is slow. In
this case, do not use the FTP server during DNC operation in the Data Server
FTP mode.
2 This appendix provides just setup examples.
The actual setup may differ from these examples depending on the personal
computer environment and other factors. When actually setting up an FTP
server, make proper settings with referencing the personal computer manual
and others.
To use an FTP server in a factory network, consult with the network
administrator of the factory.

B.1 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows 2000

Professional (FOR INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE)
Installing the Internet Information Service
1. Set the CD-ROM of Windows 2000 Professional.

- 199 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

2. Click [Install Add-On Components].

3. Select [Internet Information Services (IIS)], then click the [Details] button to display the [Internet
Information Services (IIS)] dialog box. Next, check [File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Server].

- 200 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

4. Click the [OK] button, then return to the previous screen. Next, click [Next]. The necessary files are
installed.
The installation is completed when the following screen appears:

Setting the Internet Information Service

1. Select [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel].

- 201 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

2. Double-click [Administrative Tools].

3. Double-click [Internet Service Manager] for activation.

- 202 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

4. Double-click the computer name. Next, select [Default FTP Site] and right-click to display the menu.
Then, select Properties.

5. Select the [Home Directory] tab to display the [Home Directory] property sheet. Check [Read] and
[Write] in [FTP Site Directory]. In [Directory Listing Style], [MS-DOS] is selected by default.
However, it is recommended to check [UNIX]. If files are listed in UNIX format, whether each file
is accessible can be determined.

6. Upon completion of setting, click the [Apply] button.

In [Default FTP Site], the directory named "\Inetpub\ftproot", set in [Local Path] above (in the drive
where Windows 2000 is installed), is assumed to be the home directory. So, directories under this
directory can be accessed.
So, with the default setting, NC programs need to be managed under this directory.
The home directory can be changed by setting the new directory in the [Local Path] of [FTP Site
Directory].

- 203 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

7. To access a directory other than the directories under the home directory, a virtual directory needs to
be set.
For details of a virtual directory, use the online help information of Windows 2000.

Login user setting

Create a login user to access the FTP server.
If you want to access the FTP server using a user account already created in the PC, you need not make
this setting.

1. Select [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel].

- 204 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

2. Double-click the icon [Users and Passwords].

3. Click the [Add] button, then enter necessary items such as a user name.

- 205 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

4. Click the [Next] button, then enter a password for the specified user name. (Unless a password is set,
access to the FTP server cannot be made correctly. So, be sure to enter a password.)

5. Click the [Next] button, then set an access right to be granted.

The access right set here can affect the capability to read from and write to a file in FTP-based
communication. Use care when setting an access right.

NOTE
If the type of account is not to be changed to Administrator, a file may not be
able to be read or written with the account. In this case, grant an access right to
read and write the home directory set in steps 5 and 6 in "Setting the Internet
Information Service" described above to the user account.

6. Click the [Finish] button. The entered user name is registered, and the user can log in by using the
user name and password.

Stopping password expiration for a login user

If the password expiration is not stopped, when the password expires, login is disabled, preventing FTP
communication.
Therefore, stop the password expiration as necessary.
- 206 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

When a password has expired, it is necessary to set the password again.

1. Select [Start] → [Settings] → [Control Panel].

2. Double-click the icon [Users and Passwords].

- 207 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

3. Click the [Advanced] tab.

4. Click the [Advanced] button.

- 208 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

5. Double-click [Users]. A list of registered users is displayed.

6. Double-click the user name for which you want to change the password setting.
For example, double-click "dtsvr".

- 209 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

7. Check [Password never expires] and then click the [OK] button. The password expiration is stopped.

B.2 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows XP Professional

(FOR INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE)
NOTE
Windows XP Home Edition does not have IIS (Internet Information Service).

Installing the Internet Information Service

1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows XP Professional.

- 210 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

2. Double-click [Add or Remove Programs].

3. Double-click [Add/Remove Windows Components].

- 211 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

4. Select [Internet Information Services (IIS)], then click the [Details] button to display the [Internet
Information Services (IIS)] dialog box. Next, check [File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Service].

5. Click the [OK] button, then return to the previous screen. Next, click [Next].

- 212 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

6. The dialog box above is displayed, and the necessary files are installed.

7. The installation is completed when the screen above is displayed.

Setting the Internet Information Service

1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows XP Professional.

- 213 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

2. Click [Performance and Maintenance].

3. Click [Administrative Tools].

4. Double-click [Internet Information Services].

- 214 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

5. Double-click [FTP Site], right-click [Default FTP Site] to display a menu, then select Properties.

6. Select the [Home Directory] tab to display the [Home Directory] property sheet.
Check [Read] and [Write] in [FTP Site Directory]. In [Directory Listing Style], [MS-DOS] is
selected by default. However, it is recommended to check [UNIX]. If files are listed in UNIX format,
whether each file is accessible can be determined.

7. Then, click the [OK] button.

In the standard [Default FTP Site], the directory \Inetput\ftproot (on the drive where Windows XP is
installed) is the home directory, and only the directories under the home directory can be accessed.

- 215 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

To use a directory other than the default directory as a home directory, modify the local path of [FTP
Site Directory] mentioned in step 6 above.

8. To access a directory other than the directories under the home directory set in step 7 above, a
virtual directory needs to be set.
For details of a virtual directory, use information such as the online help information of Windows
XP.

Login user setting

Create a login user to access the FTP server.
If you want to access the FTP server using a user account already created in the PC, you need not make
this setting.

1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows XP Professional.

2. Double-click the icon of [User Accounts].

- 216 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

3. Click [Create a new account], then enter a desired user name.

4. Click the [Next] button, then set an account type.

The access right set here can affect the capability to read from and write to a file in FTP-based
communication. Use care when setting an access right.

NOLTE
If the type of account is not to be changed to Administrator, a file may not be
able to be read or written with the account. In this case, grant an access right to
read and write the home directory set in steps 6 and 7 in "Setting the Internet
Information Service" described above to the user account.

- 217 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

5. Click the [Create Account] button, then the creation of an account is completed.

6. For password setting, click the previously created account in [or pick an account to change]. (The
FTP server cannot be accessed without setting a password. So, be sure to execute this step.)

7. Click [Create a password], then enter a password for the specified user name.

- 218 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

8. Click the [Create Password] button to register the entered password. By using the account registered
this time, the user can log in to the FTP server.

Stopping password expiration for a login user

If the password expiration is not stopped, the Data Server will not be able to communicate with the FTP
server at the time of expiring the password.
If you are necessary, stop the password expiration.
If the password is expired, it is necessary that you re-enter the password.

1. Select [Start] → [All Programs] → [Accessories] → [Command Prompt].

2. Input “net user login-user /expires:never”.

3. If the above message is displayed, the password expiration is stopped.

Confirming the Firewall function of Windows XP

Because the Internet Connection Firewall function is included in the Windows XP Professional, the Data
Server cannot communicate with the FTP server.
If the FTP connection cannot be established, confirm the following setting of the Internet Connection
Firewall function.

NOTE
When settings are made as described below, the FTP server functions and
response to PING, which have been disabled by the network security function,
are enabled.
Therefore, when making the following settings, consult with your network
administrator, and take special care.
In some cases, it becomes necessary to isolate the network from the outside as
required.

- 219 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows XP Professional.

2. Click the icon of [Network and Internet Connections].

3. Click the icon [Network Connections].

- 220 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

4. Right-click the icon [Local Area Connection] to display the menu. Then, select Properties.

5. Select the [Advanced] tab.

6. If [Internet Connection Firewall] is not checked, the Internet Connection Firewall function does not
work. Then, the following confirmations are not necessary.

- 221 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

7. If [Internet Connection Firewall] is checked, click the [Settings…] button.

8. If the [FTP Server] check-box is not checked, the FTP server function does not work. Check the
[FTP Server] check-box.
When the [FTP Server] check-box is checked, the following window is displayed. Then, click the
[OK] button.

- 222 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

9. Select the [ICMP] tab.

- 223 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

10. If the [Allow incoming echo request] check-box is not checked, the Data Server function cannot find
the FTP server at the start of communication.
At the start of communication of Data Server, if the message “[FTP] (IP-address) IS NOT
AVAILABLE” is displayed, check this check-box.

Confirming the firewall function when Windows XP (Service Pack 2) is used

When Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 2) is used, a different firewall setting procedure is used.

1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows XP Professional.

- 224 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

2. Double-click [Security Center] to start it.

3. Click [Windows Firewall] displayed at the bottom.

- 225 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

4. Select the [Advanced] tab.

5. Click the [Settings] button of [ICMP].

- 226 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

6. If [Allow incoming echo request] is not checked, check it, and click the [OK] button.
This allows a response to be made to PING from other devices.

7. Select the [Exceptions] tab.

8. Click the [Add Port] button, and make settings as follows:

- 227 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

9. Click the [OK] button.

- 228 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

B.3 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows Vista (FOR

INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE)
NOTE
Windows Vista Home Basic and Windows Vista Home Premium do not have IIS
(Internet Information Service).

Installing the Internet Information Service

1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows Vista.

2. Click [Programs].

- 229 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

3. Click [Turn Windows features on or off].

4. Expand [Internet Information Services], then check [FTP Management Console] and [FTP Server] in
[FTP Publishing Service]. Next, click the [OK] button.

- 230 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

5. The dialog box below is displayed, and the necessary files are installed.

6. The installation is completed when the dialog box above and [Windows Features] dialog box are
finished.

Setting the Internet Information Service

1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows Vista.

- 231 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

2. Click [System and Maintenance].

3. Click [Administrative Tools].

- 232 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

4. Double-click [Services] to start it.

5. Select [FTP Publishing Service], right-click it to display a menu, then select Properties.

- 233 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

6. Display the [General] property sheet.

Change [Manual] to [Automatic] in [Startup type] and click the [Start] button in [Service status],
then click the [OK] button.
End [Services].

7. Return to [Administrative Tools], then Double-click [Internet Information Services (IIS) 6.0
Manager] ([IIS6 Manager]) to start it.

- 234 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

8. Double-click [FTP Sites], right-click [Default FTP Site] to display a menu, then select Properties.

9. Select the [Home Directory] tab to display the [Home Directory] property sheet.
Check [Read] and [Write] in [FTP site directory]. In [Directory listing style], [MS-DOS] is selected
by default. However, it is recommended to check [UNIX]. If files are listed in UNIX format,
whether each file is accessible can be determined.

- 235 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

10. Then, click the [OK] button.

In the standard [Default FTP Site], the directory \inetpub\ftproot (on the drive where Windows Vista
is installed) is the home directory, and only the directories under the home directory can be accessed.
To use a directory other than the default directory as a home directory, modify the local path of [FTP
site directory] mentioned in step 9 above.

11. To access a directory other than the directories under the home directory set in step 10 above, a
virtual directory needs to be set.
For details of a virtual directory, use information such as the online help information of Windows
Vista.

Login User Setting

Create a login user to access the FTP server.
If you want to access the FTP server using a user account already created in the PC, you need not make
this setting.

1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows Vista.

2. Click [User Accounts].

- 236 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

3. Click [Add or remove user accounts].

4. Click [Create a new account], then enter a desired user name and set an account type.
The access right set here can affect the right to read from and write to a file in FTP-based
communication. Use care when setting an access right.

NOTE
If the type of account is not to be changed to Administrator, a file may not be
able to be read or written with the account. In this case, grant an access right to
read and write the home directory set in steps 9 and 10 in "Setting the Internet
Information Service" described above to the user account.

- 237 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

5. Click the [Create Account] button, then the creation of an account is completed.

6. For password setting, click the previously created account. (The FTP server cannot be accessed
without setting a password. So, be sure to execute this step.)

- 238 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

7. Click [Create a password], then enter a password for the specified user name.

8. Click the [Create password] button to register the entered password. By using the account registered
this time, the user can log in to the FTP server.

Stopping password expiration for a login user

If the password expiration is not stopped, the Data Server will not be able to communicate with the FTP
server at the time of expiring the password.
If you are necessary, stop the password expiration.
If the password is expired, it is necessary that you re-enter the password.

1. Select [Start] → [All Programs] → [Accessories] → [Command Prompt], right-click it to display a

menu, then select [Run as administrator].

- 239 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

2. Input “net user login-user /expires:never”.

3. If the above message is displayed, the password expiration is stopped.

Confirming the Firewall function of Windows Vista

Because the Internet Connection Firewall function is included in the Windows Vista, the Data Server may
not communicate with the FTP server.
If the FTP connection cannot be established, confirm the following setting of the Internet Connection
Firewall function.

NOTE
When settings are made as described below, the FTP server functions and
response to PING, which have been disabled by the network security function,
are enabled.
Therefore, when making the following settings, consult with your network
administrator, and take special care.
In some cases, it becomes necessary to isolate the network from the outside as
required.

1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows Vista.

- 240 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

2. Click [System and Maintenance].

3. Click [Administrative Tools].

- 241 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

4. Double-click [Windows Firewall with Advanced Security] to start it.

5. Click [Inbound Rules], select [File and Printer Sharing (Echo Request - ICMPv4 - In)] from the list,
right-click it to display a menu, then select Properties.

- 242 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

6. Display the [General] property sheet.

Check [Enabled] in [General], then click the [OK] button.
End [Windows Firewall with Advanced Security].

7. Return to [Control Panel], then click [Security].

- 243 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

8. Click [Windows Firewall].

9. Click [Change settings].

- 244 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

10. Select the [Exceptions] tab.

Check [FTP Server], then click the [OK] button.

- 245 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

B.4 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows 7 (FOR

INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE)
NOTE
The FTP Server features depend on the Edition of Windows 7.
Windows 7 Professional, Enterprise, and Ultimate have the FTP Server features.
The setting described above is just an example.

Installing the Internet Information Service

1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows 7.

2. Click [Programs].

- 246 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

3. Click [Turn Windows features on or off].

4. Expand [Internet Information Services], then check [FTP Service] in [FTP Server] and [IIS
Management Console] in [Web Management Tools]. Next, click the [OK] button.

- 247 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

5. The dialog box below is displayed, and the necessary files are installed.

6. The installation is completed when the dialog box above and [Windows Features] dialog box are
finished.

Setting the Internet Information Service

1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows 7.

- 248 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

2. Click [System and Security].

3. Click [Administrative Tools].

- 249 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

4. Double-click [Services] to start it.

5. Select [Microsoft FTP Service], right-click it to display a menu, then select Properties.

- 250 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

6. Display the [General] property sheet.

Choose [Automatic] from [Startup type] drop-down list. Next, if [Service status] is not [Started],
click the [Start] button to start FTP service, then click the [OK] button to end [Services].

7. Return to [Administrative Tools], then double-click [Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager] to
start it.

- 251 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

8. Right-click Computer name(“PC1” in the following figure) to display a left side menu, then select
[Add FTP Site...].

9. In the displayed [Site Information] dialog box below, set the name of an FTP site to be created in
[FTP site name:] and the path to the FTP server home directory in [Physical path:] in [Content
Directory]. The FTP clients can access only the directories under the home directory set in this step.
Click [Next] button.

- 252 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

10. The [Binding and SSL setting] dialog box below is displayed.
Input the IP address and port number (usually 21) in [IP Address] and [Port].
Check [Start FTP site automatically] and select [No SSL] in [SSL].
Click [Next] button.

11. The [Authentication and Authorization Information] dialog box below is displayed.
Check [Basic] in [Authentication], choose [All users] from [Allow access to:] drop-down list in
[Authorization], and check [Read] and [Write] in [Permissions].
Click [Finish] button.

- 253 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

12. Expand tree in left pane and select FTP site name set in step 9.
A feature menu of FTP site is displayed. Double-click [FTP Directory Browsing].

13. In [Directory Listing Style], [MS-DOS] is selected by default.

However, it is recommended to select [UNIX]. If files are listed in UNIX format, whether each file is
accessible can be determined.

- 254 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

14. To access a directory other than the directories under the home directory set in step 9 above, a virtual
directory needs to be set.
For details of a virtual directory, use information such as the online help information of Windows 7.

Login User Setting

Create a login user to access the FTP server.
If you want to access the FTP server using a user account already created in the PC, you need not make
this setting.

1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows 7.

2. Click [Add or remove user accounts].

3. Click [Create a new account], then enter a desired user name and set an account type.
The access right can affect the right to read from and write to a file in FTP-based communication.
Use care when setting an access right.

- 255 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

NOTE
When Administrator is not selected as the account type, files may not be able to
be read or written by the account. In this case, grant an access right to read and
write the home directory set in step 9 in "Setting the Internet Information Service"
described above to the user account.

4. Click the [Create Account] button, then the creation of an account is completed.

- 256 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

5. For password setting, click the previously created account. (The FTP server cannot be accessed
without setting a password. So, be sure to execute this step.)

6. Click [Create a password], then enter a password for the specified user name.

8. Click the [Create password] button to register the entered password. By using the account registered
this time, the user can log in to the FTP server.

Stopping password expiration for a login user

If the password expiration is not stopped, the Data Server will not be able to communicate with the FTP
server at the time of expiring the password. If necessary, stop the password expiration.
If the password is expired, it is necessary that you re-enter the password.

- 257 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows 7.

2. Click [System and Security].

- 258 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

3. Click [Administrative Tools].

4. Double-click [Computer Management] to start it.

- 259 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

5. Expand [Local Users and Groups] in left pane, then click [Users]. A list of registered users is
displayed.
Double-click the user name for which you want to change the password setting.

6. Check [Password never expires] and then click [OK] button.

The password expiration is stopped.

- 260 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

Checking the Windows 7 network

Windows 8 manages networks by network connection location. In addition, it is necessary to set the
Windows 7 standard firewall function, which will be described later, by network location type. Before
setting the firewall, check the type of network location you use as described below.

1 Open [Control Panel] of Windows 7.

- 261 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

2 Click [Network and Internet].

3 Click [Network and Sharing Center].

- 262 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

4 The string (in a red circle) displayed under [View your active networks] indicates the network
location type. There are two typical types of network locations: Private network (Work network and
Home network) and public network.

Confirming the Firewall function of Windows 7

Because the Internet Connection Firewall function is included in the Windows 7, the Data Server may not
communicate with the FTP server.
If the FTP connection cannot be established, confirm the following setting of the Internet Connection
Firewall function.

NOTE
When settings are made as described below, the FTP server functions and
response to PING, which have been disabled by the network security function,
are enabled.
Therefore, when making the following settings, consult with your network
administrator, and take special care.
In some cases, it becomes necessary to isolate the network from the outside as
required.

1. Open [Control Panel] of Windows 7.

- 263 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

2. Click [System and Security].

3. Click [Allow a program through Windows Firewall].

- 264 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

4. Click [Change settings].

5. Check [FTP Server] and network location types.

Network location types depend on the connecting network setting and configuration.

6. Click [OK] button to close this window.

- 265 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

7. Return to [System and Security], then click [Windows Firewall].

8. Click [Advanced settings].

- 266 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

9. Click [Inbound Rules].

10. Check if [FTP Server (FTP Traffic-In)], [FTP Server Passive (FTP Passive Traffic-In)], and [File
and Printer Sharing (Echo Request - ICMPv4-In)] are enabled. If those rules are not enable, select
them and click [Enable Rule] in right pane. There are same name rule in [Inbound Rules], but their
targets are different network location. The choice of rule to change enabled depend on rule’s
[Profile] and network location types.

- 267 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

B.5 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows 8 (FOR

INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE)
Installing the Internet Information Service
1 Open [Control Panel] of Windows 8.

- 268 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

2 Click [Programs].

3 Click [Turn Windows features on or off].

- 269 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

4 Expand [Internet Information Services], then check [FTP Service] in [FTP Server] and [IIS
Management Console] in [Web Management Tools]. Next, click the [OK] button.

5 The dialog box below is displayed, and the necessary files are installed.

- 270 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

6 The following dialog box is displayed. Click the [Close] button. The installation is now completed.

Setting the Internet Information Service

1 Open [Control Panel] of Windows 8.

- 271 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

2 Click [System and Security].

3 Click [Administrative Tools].

- 272 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

4 Double-click [Services] to start it.

5 Select [Microsoft FTP Service], right-click it to display a menu, then select Properties.

6 Display the [General] property sheet.

Choose [Automatic] from [Startup type] drop-down list. Next, if [Service status] is not [Running],
click the [Start] button to start FTP service, then click the [OK] button to end [Services].

- 273 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

7 Return to [Administrative Tools], then double-click [Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager] to
start it.

8 Right-click Computer name to display a left side menu, then select [Add FTP Site...].

- 274 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

9 In the displayed [Site Information] dialog box below, set the name of an FTP site to be created in
[FTP site name:] and the path to the FTP server home directory in [Physical path:] in [Content
Directory]. The FTP clients can access only the directories under the home directory set in this step.
Click [Next] button.

10 The [Binding and SSL setting] dialog box below is displayed.

Input the IP address and port number (usually 21) in [IP Address] and [Port].
Check [Start FTP site automatically] and select [No SSL] in [SSL].
Click [Next] button.

- 275 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

11 The [Authentication and Authorization Information] dialog box below is displayed.

Check [Basic] in [Authentication], choose [All users] from [Allow access to:] drop-down list in
[Authorization], and check [Read] and [Write] in [Permissions].
Click [Finish] button.

12 Expand tree in left pane and select FTP site name set in step 9.
A feature menu of FTP site is displayed. Double-click [FTP Directory Browsing].

- 276 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

13 In [Directory Listing Style], [MS-DOS] is selected by default.

However, it is recommended to select [UNIX]. If files are listed in UNIX format, whether each file
is accessible can be determined.

14 To access a directory other than the directories under the home directory set in step 9 above, a
virtual directory needs to be set.
For details of a virtual directory, use information such as the online help information of Windows 8.

Login User Setting

Create a login user to access the FTP server.
If you want to access the FTP server using a user account already created in the PC, you need not make
this setting.

- 277 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

1 Open [PC settings] of Windows 8 and click [Users].

2 Click [Add a user]. Input values in [Username], [Password], and [Password hint] and click the [Next]
button.

- 278 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

3 Click the [Finish] button, then the creation of an account is completed.

Changing the account type

The user account created as described above is registered as a standard user.
Change the account type to Administrator as required.

NOTE
If the type of account is not to be changed to Administrator, a file may not be
able to be read or written with the account. In this case, grant an access right to
read and write the home directory set in step 9 in "Setting the Internet
Information Service" described above to the user account.

- 279 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

1 Open [Control Panel] of Windows 8.

2 Click [Change the account type].

- 280 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

3 Click the account of which type is to be changed (dtsvr in this example).

4 Click [Change the account type].

5 Change the account type to Administrator and click the [Change Account Type] button.
- 281 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

Stopping password expiration for a login user

If the password expiration is not stopped, the Data Server will not be able to communicate with the FTP
server at the time of expiring the password. If necessary, stop the password expiration.
If the password is expired, it is necessary that you re-enter the password.

1 Open [Control Panel] of Windows 8.

- 282 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

2 Click [System and Security].

3 Click [Administrative Tools].

- 283 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

4 Double-click [Computer Management] to start it. Expand [Local Users and Groups] in left pane,
then click [Users].

5 A list of registered users is displayed. Double-click the user name for which you want to change the
password setting.

6 Check [Password never expires] and then click [OK] button. The password expiration is stopped.

- 284 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

Checking the Windows 8 network

Windows 8 manages networks by network connection location. In addition, it is necessary to set the
Windows 8 standard firewall function, which will be described later, by network location type. Before
setting the firewall, check the type of network location you use as described below.

1 Open [Control Panel] of Windows 8.

- 285 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

2 Click [Network and Internet].

3 Click [Network and Sharing Center].

4 The string (in a red circle) displayed under [View your active networks] indicates the network
location type. There are two typical types of network locations: Private network and public network.
- 286 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

Confirming the Firewall function of Windows 8

Because the Internet Connection Firewall function is included in the Windows 8, the Data Server may not
communicate with the FTP server.
If the FTP connection cannot be established, confirm the following setting of the Internet Connection
Firewall function.

NOTE
When settings are made as described below, the FTP server functions and
response to PING, which have been disabled by the network security function,
are enabled.
Therefore, when making the following settings, consult with your network
administrator, and take special care.
In some cases, it becomes necessary to isolate the network from the outside as
required.

1 Open [Control Panel] of Windows 8.

- 287 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

2 Click [System and Security].

3 Click [Allow apps to communicate through Windows Firewall].

- 288 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

4 Click [Change settings] and check [FTP Server] and the network location(s) according to the
network setting in the [Allowed apps and features] list. You can check the network location type
according to the procedure described in "Checking the Windows 8 network" above.

5 Click [OK] and close [Allowed applications].

- 289 -
B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

6 Return to [System and Security], then click [Windows Firewall].

7 Click [Advanced settings].

- 290 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX B.EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP

8 Click [Inbound Rules]

9 Check if [FTP Server Passive (FTP Passive Traffic-In)], [FTP Server (FTP Traffic-In)], and [File
and Printer Sharing (Echo Request - ICMPv4-In)] are enabled. If those rules are not enable, select
them and click [Enable Rule] in right pane. There are same name rule in [Inbound Rules], but their
targets are different network location. The choice of rule to change enabled depend on rule’s
[Profile] and network location types. You can check the network location type according to the
procedure described in "Checking the Windows 8 network" above.

- 291 -
C. EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP
DNS/DHCP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

C EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP

This appendix describes the method of setting up the DNS/DHCP server of Windows 2000 Server.

NOTE
This appendix provides just examples of setup using Windows 2000 Server. To
use the DNS/DHCP server in an actual factory network, consult with the network
administrator of the factory and make settings according to the actual network
environment.

Example of setting a simple network

An example of setup in a network configuration that satisfies the following conditions is provided:
1. The DHCP server and DNS server are operated using the same personal computer.
2. The IP address of the DHCP server and DNS server is 192.168.0.254.
3. The DHCP server controls the IP address range 192.168.0.10 to 192.168.0.29.
4. The domain controlled by the DNS server is named "factory".
5. The same domain includes the DHCP server, DNS server, CNCs, and a PC for FOCAS1/Ethernet
applications.

Windows 2000 Server

DNS server
DHCP server
192.168.0.254
Domain : factory

...
CNC CNC PC
Automatic setting Automatic setting Automatic setting

Example of network configuration

NOTE
The setting described above is just an example. For setup in an actual network
configuration in the factory, consult with the network administrator of the factory.

- 292 -
 C.EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX DNS/DHCP

C.1 EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DHCP SERVER OF Windows

2000 Server
1. Activating the Microsoft administrative console (DHCP)
Click [Programs] → [Administrative Tools] → [DHCP].

2. Adding a scope
Click [Action] → [New Scope] to start “New Scope Wizard”.

Click the [Next] button.

- 293 -
C. EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP
DNS/DHCP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

Enter "factory" as [Name], and enter "FACTORY" as [Description].

Click the [Next] button.

Enter “192.168.0.10” as [Start IP address], enter “192.168.0.29” as [End IP address], enter “24” as
[Length], and enter “255.255.255.0” as [Subnet mask].

Click the [Next] button.

Click the [Next] button without entering any data.

- 294 -
 C.EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX DNS/DHCP

Keep "8" days unchanged as Period, then click the [Next] button.

Keep [Yes, I want to configure these options now] selected, and click the [Next] button.

Click the [Next] button without entering any data.

- 295 -
C. EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP
DNS/DHCP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

Enter “192.168.0.254” as IP Address, then click [Add].

Click the [Next] button.

Click the [Next] button without entering any data.

Keep [Yes, I want to activate this scope now] selected, and click the [Next] button.

- 296 -
 C.EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX DNS/DHCP

Click [Finish].

3. Adding a scope option

Click [Scope[192.168.0.0]factory], then click [Scope Options] → [Action] → [Configure Options].

From the available options, find and check [DNS Domain Name]. Then, enter "factory" as String value.

Click the [OK] button.

- 297 -
C. EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP
DNS/DHCP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

The following setting is made:

4. Enabling Dynamic DNS

Click [Scope[192.168.0.0]factory] → [Properties] → [DNS].

Check [Always update DNC] and [Enable updates for DNS clients that do not support dynamic update].

Click the [OK] button.

This completes DHCP server setting.

- 298 -
 C.EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX DNS/DHCP

C.2 EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS SERVER OF Windows

2000 Server
1. Activating the Microsoft administrative console (DNS)
Click [Programs] → [Administrative Tools] → [DNS].

2. DNS server configuration

Click [Action] → [Configure the server] to start [Configure DNS Server Wizard].

Click the [Next] button.

- 299 -
C. EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP
DNS/DHCP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

Keep [This is the first DNS server on this network] selected, and click the [Next] button.

Keep [Yes, create a forward lookup zone], and click the [Next] button.

Keep [Standard primary] selected, and click the [Next] button.

- 300 -
 C.EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX DNS/DHCP
Enter "factory." as Name. (Do not fail to enter "." after "factory".)

Click the [Next] button.

Keep “factory.dns” unchanged, and click the [Next] button.

Keep [Yes, create a reverse lookup zone] selected, and click the [Next] button.

- 301 -
C. EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP
DNS/DHCP APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

Keep [Standard primary] selected, and click the [Next] button.

Enter “192.168.0” as Network ID.

Click the [Next] button.

Keep “0.168.192.in-addr.arpa.dns” unchanged, and click the [Next] button.

- 302 -
 C.EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX DNS/DHCP

Click the [Finish] button.

3. Enabling Dynamic DNS

Right-click [Forward Lookup Zones] → [factory].

Click [Properties].

For [Allow dynamic updates?], select [Yes].

Click the [OK] button.

This completes DNS server setting.

- 303 -
D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

D FTP CLIENT OPERATION

This appendix describes the method of operating an FTP client that operates on the host computer to
function as a communication destination for the Data Server functions.

D.1 OPERATION USING THE FTP COMMAND

Login
1 Enter "ftp IP-address-of-NC or host-name" at the command prompt.
2 Enter a user name.
3 Enter a password.
4 The message, "230 User logged in, proceed." indicates that the login process has been completed
successfully.

GET (acquiring a file from the FTP server)

1 Enter "get hard-disk-file-name."

MGET (acquiring files from the FTP server)

1 Enter "mget hard-disk-file-name (including a wildcard character)."

- 304 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION

PUT (sending a file to the FTP server)

1 Enter "put host-file-name hard-disk-file-name."

MPUT (sending files to the FTP server)

1 Enter "mput host-file-name (including a wildcard character)."

DIR (acquiring a list of files of the FTP server)

1 Enter dir.

DEL (deleting a file from the FTP server)

1 Enter "del hard-disk-file-name."

TYPE (confirming the transfer type of the FTP client)

1. Enter type.
2. Whether the ascii mode or binary mode is set can be determined.

- 305 -
D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

ASCII, BIN (changing the transfer type of the FTP client)

1. Entering bin can change the mode to the binary mode.

2. Entering ascii can change the mode to the ascii mode.

Logout
1 Enter bye.

D.2 OPERATION USING THE Explorer

D.2.1 Displaying the File List

Windows Explorer can display the file list in Data Server by adding the network shortcut that connects to
Data Server with FTP connection.
Display layout (such as Icon, List, or Detail etc.) of files in Data Server can be selected by standard
operation of Windows Explorer.

Register Data Server as a Network Place (for Windows 2000 Professional)

1. Start an Explorer.

- 306 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION
2. Select [Map Network Drive] in the submenu of [Tools] on the menu bar.

3. Click “Create a shortcut to a Web folder or FTP site.” to start “Add Network Place Wizard”.

4. Input the user name, the password, and the IP address of Data Server for logging in to Data Server,
then click [Next]. The format is “ftp://[user name]:[password]@[IP address of Data Server]”.

- 307 -
D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

5. Input the name for Data Server, then click [Finish].

6. The file list in Data Server can be displayed by the Explorer.

The icon of Data Server is added in My Network Places. For the next time, the file list in Data
Server can be displayed by double-clicking this icon.

- 308 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION

Register Data Server as a Network Place (for Windows XP Professional)

1. Start an Explorer.

2. Select [Map Network Drive] in the submenu of [Tools] on the menu bar.

- 309 -
D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

3. Click “Sign up for online storage or connect to a network server.” to start “Add Network Place
Wizard”. Next, click [Next].

4. Select “Choose another network location”, then click [Next].

- 310 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION
5. Input the user name, the password, and the IP address of Data Server for logging in to Data Server,
then click [Next]. The format is “ftp://[user name]:[password]@[IP address of Data Server]”.

6. Input the name for Data Server, then click [Next].

- 311 -
D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

7. Click [Finish].

8 Check [Enable folder view for FTP sites] in Internet Options as follows. (This item is checked by
default.)

- 312 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION

NOTE
If this item is not checked, the file list in Data Server is displayed as shown in the
following figure, and the files cannot be transferred by operating drag and drop.

9. The file list in Data Server can be displayed by the Explorer.

The icon of Data Server is added in My Network Places. For the next time, the file list in Data
Server can be displayed by double-clicking this icon.

- 313 -
D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

Register Data Server as a Network Location (for Windows Vista Business or

Windows 7 Professional)
1. Start an Explorer.

2. Display the menu of [Organize], then check [Menu Bar] in [Layout] to display the menu bar.

- 314 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION
3. Select [Map Network Drive] in the submenu of [Tools] on the menu bar.

4. Click “Connect to a Web site that you can use to store your documents and pictures.” to start “Add
Network Location”. Next, click [Next].

- 315 -
D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

5. Select “Choose a custom network location”, then click [Next].

When Windows 7 Professional is used, display “Connect to the internet” and click [Cancel] to
display above screen.

- 316 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION
6. Input the user name, the password, and the IP address of Data Server for logging in to Data Server,
then click [Next]. The format is “ftp://[user name]:[password]@[IP address of Data Server]”.

7. Input the name for Data Server, then click [Next].

- 317 -
D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

8. Click [Finish].

9. The file list in Data Server can be displayed by the Explorer.

The icon of Data Server is added in Computer. For the next time, the file list in Data Server can be
displayed by double-clicking this icon.

- 318 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION

NOTE
1 If Work Offline is run in Internet Explorer, when the file list in Data Server attempt
to be displayed by the Explorer, the error shown below occurs.

In this case, it is necessary to stop Work Offline in Internet Explorer. Remove

check [Work Offline] in submenu of [File] on the menu bar in Internet Explorer.

2 Even if the file list in Data Server is changed by operating CNC, it is not
automatically updated in the Explorer. If the FTP communication with Data
Server is not performed for five minutes or more, Data Server disconnects the
FTP connection. Execute [Refresh] in the Explorer to acquire the latest file list in
Data Server.

D.2.2 File Operation and File Transfer

NOTE
Files in Data Server cannot be copied or moved to another folder in Data Server
by standard operation of Windows Explorer.

MOVE FOLDER
A work folder in Data Server can be moved by standard operation of Windows Explorer.

CREATE FOLDER
A new folder can be created in Data Server by standard operation of Windows Explorer.

- 319 -
D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

NOTE
1 To create a new folder in Data Server by standard operation of Windows
Explorer, the DataServer Explorer connection option (R953) is required.
2 The name of the folder ("New Folder") made by standard operation of Windows
Explorer contains characters that cannot be used in Data Server. Be sure to
rename that folder by operation of the Explorer. If not renamed, that folder
cannot be used in Data Server.
As shown in the following figure, characters that cannot be used in Data Server
are displayed as ‘#’ in DATA SERVER FILE LIST screen.

3 The limitation of Data Server is applied. For details, see Subsection 1.2.1,
"Displaying and Operating the File List," in Part IV, "OPERATION."

DELETE
A file or folder (multiple files or folders) in Data Server can be deleted by standard operation of Windows
Explorer.

NOTE
1 The folder to be deleted need not be empty. When the folder is not empty, all
files and sub-folders in the folder are deleted.
2 There is not limitation of number of files or folders that can be selected at a time.
3 The limitation of Data Server is applied. For details, see Subsection 1.2.1,
"Displaying and Operating the File List," in Part IV, "OPERATION."

RENAME
A file or folder in Data Server can be renamed by standard operation of Windows Explorer.

NOTE
The limitation of Data Server is applied. For details, see Subsection 1.2.1,
"Displaying and Operating the File List," in Part IV, "OPERATION."

DISPLAY FILE CONTENTS

Contents of a file in Data Server can be displayed by standard operation of Windows Explorer.

NOTE
Contents of a file is displayed by Internet Explorer regardless of the relation by
the extension.
If a file is not downloaded to the personal computer side, the contents of the file
cannot be edited.

- 320 -
B-64014EN/06 APPENDIX D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION

FILE TRANSFER
Start two Windows Explorers. One Explorer displays the file list in Data Server, and the other displays
the file list in the personal computer.
Some files can be transferred by operating drag and drop from one window to the other.
The figure below shows the example that a file in the personal computer side is transferred to the Data
Server side.

File list in PC side

Operates drag & drop

File list in Data Server side

Example of file transfer by using Windows Explorer

NOTE
1 If an error occurs, check the cause of the error according to the Item,
“ETHERNET LOG screen” in Section 2.1, ”ETHERNET LOG” in Part VI,
“MAINTENANCE.”
2 Files cannot sometimes be transferred depending on the operation status and
protection status.
3 The attribute of files to be transferred by using Windows Explorer is fixed to
binary. When NC programs are transferred as text files, fix the attribute to text by
the setting of parameter No.929. For details, see Section 2.2, "RELATED NC
PARAMETERS," in Part III, "SETTING."
4 When a file is transferred to Data Server, if a file having the same name as a file
to be transferred from the personal computer is already present on Data Server,
by the setting of bit 2 of parameter No.906, you can select whether the existing
file is overwritten or an error is caused. For details, see Section 2.2, "RELATED
NC PARAMETERS," in Part III, "SETTING."

- 321 -
D.FTP CLIENT OPERATION APPENDIX B-64014EN/06

D.3 SECURITY UNBLOCKING IN Windows XP (Service Pack

2) / Vista
When an attempt is made to start FTP communication for the first time in Windows XP (Service Pack 2)
or Windows Vista, the security alert shown below may appear.
If the alert appears, consult with the network administrator, and select "Unblock" as necessary.

Security Alert of Windows XP (Service Pack 2)

Security Alert of Windows Vista

CAUTIOJN
Since selecting "Unblock" means change in settings related to network security,
be sure to consult with the network administrator in advance.
If "Unblock" is selected carelessly, network security can be compromised.

- 322 -
B-64014EN/06 INDEX

INDEX
EXAMPLE OF SETTING DNS/DHCP.........................64
<A> EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE DATA SERVER
ALARM AND DIAGNOSIS DATA ...........................190 FUNCTIONS .............................................................56
APPLICABLE MODELS ................................................3 EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet
FUNCTIONS .............................................................60
<B> EXAMPLE OF SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE
BACKING UP/RESTORING COMMUNICATION DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS .......................................77
PARAMETERS..........................................................37 EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DHCP SERVER OF
Windows 2000 Server ..............................................293
<C> EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS SERVER OF
CABLE CONNECTION..............................................156 Windows 2000 Server ..............................................299
Cable Connection .........................................................159 EXAMPLE OF SETTING UP DNS/DHCP.................292
Cable Materials ............................................................159 EXECUTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING
CHECK ITEMS AT INSTALLATION .......................166 FUNCTION................................................................88
CHECKING COMMUNICATION..............................196
CHECKING COMMUNICATION WITH A HUB .....195 <F>
CHECKING SETTINGS .............................................195 File Names of CNC File Management ...........................13
Checking the Selected Hardware Option .......................10 File Operation and File Transfer ..................................319
Clamping and Shielding Cables ...................................161 File Operation between the Data Server and USB
COMMUNICATION FUNCTIONS OPERATING ON Memory ....................................................................118
HARDWARE OPTIONS .............................................8 File Transfer Operation ......................................... 116,125
COMMUNICATION RETRY MONITORING FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS ...................................29
FUNCTION..............................................................191 Forcibly Terminating Diagnosis ..................................136
COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE CONFIRMATION FTP CLIENT OPERATION ........................................304
..................................................................................186 FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION .............................34
COMMUNICATION STATE CONFIRMATION.......185 FTP SERVER FUNCTIONS .......................................132
Component Layout................................................171,174 FTP SERVER MAINTENANCE ................................187
CONNECTING TO Ethernet .......................................156
Connector Specification ...............................................161 <G>
CONTROLLING THE MACHINE REMOTE GENERAL.......................................................................3
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS FROM THE PMC .........73 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ............... s-2
GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION
<D> DEVELOPMENT ..................................................... s-3
DATA SERVER FILE MANAGEMENT......................13 Grounding the Network................................................164
DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS .....................................12
DATA SERVER MODES..............................................15 <H>
DATASERVER Explorer CONNECTION....................25 HARDWARE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION ....171
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND HARDWARE ON WHICH Ethernet OPERATES ..........7
NOTE ........................................................................s-1
DETAILS OF THE BUFFER MODE............................17 <I>
DEVICE CHANGE ON THE PROGRAM FOLDER Installation ............................................................ 147,152
SCREEN............................................................105,138 Installation on a stand-alone type unit .................. 148,153
Diagnosis status............................................................134 Installation on an LCD-mounted type unit............ 147,152
Displaying and Operating the File List ..........110,123,140 Installing a memory card....................................... 149,154
Displaying the File List................................................306 ISO CODE INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION ...................26
DNC OPERATION......................................................129
DNS/DHCP CLIENT FUNCTIONS..............................30 <L>
LEADING OUT THE Ethernet CABLE......................157
<E> LED Indications and Meanings............................. 172,175
ELECTRICAL NOISE COUNTERMEASURES ........161 LIST FILE FORMAT ....................................................23
ERROR MESSAGES DISPLAYED DURING
PARAMETER SETTING ........................................102 <M>
Error numbers and error messages ...............................135 M198-BASED SUBPROGRAM CALL ......................128
ETHERNET CONNECTION CONFIRMATION .......183 MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS ......31
Ethernet LOG...............................................................178
EXAMPLE OF FTP SERVER SETUP........................199
i-1
INDEX B-64014EN/06

<N> SETTING OF DNS ........................................................61

NC PROGRAM FORMAT ............................................22 SETTING THE COMMUNICATION FUNCTION......37
NC PROGRAM INPUT........................................130,143 SETTING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS ...........41
NC PROGRAM OUTPUT ....................................130,143 SETTING THE DNS/DHCP FUNCTION.....................61
Number of Files Which Can Be Registered on a Data SETTING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet FUNCTIONS.........57
Server .........................................................................14 SETTING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER FUNCTION
...............................................................................96,97
<O> SETTING THE MACHINE REMOTE DIAGNOSIS
OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FILE LIST FUNCTIONS .............................................................68
SCREEN...................................................................106 SETTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING
OPERATING THE DATA SERVER FUNCTIONS ...105 FUNCTION................................................................79
OPERATING THE DATA SERVER HOST FILE LIST SETTING THE UNSOLICITED MESSAGING
SCREEN...................................................................121 FUNCTION................................................................79
OPERATING THE DATA SERVER SETTING SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows 2000
SCREEN.....................................................................42 Professional (FOR INTERNET INFORMATION
OPERATING THE FOCAS2/Ethernet SETTING SERVICE)................................................................199
SCREEN.....................................................................57 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows 7 (FOR
OPERATING THE FTP FILE TRANSFER INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE) ...............246
FUNCTION..............................................................137 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows 8 (FOR
OPERATING THE FTP TRANSFER HOST FILE INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE) ...............268
LIST SCREEN .........................................................139 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows Vista (FOR
OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE INTERNET INFORMATION SERVICE) ...............229
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTIONS .....................................133 SETTING UP FTP SERVER OF Windows XP
OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE Professional (FOR INTERNET INFORMATION
DIAGNOSIS SCREEN ............................................133 SERVICE)................................................................210
OPERATING THE MACHINE REMOTE Signal Timing Charts .....................................................75
DIAGNOSIS SETTING SCREEN.............................68 Signals............................................................................73
OPERATION FROM A DATA SERVER .....................20 SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE INFORMATION......178
OPERATION USING THE Explorer...........................306 Specifications........................................................ 147,151
OPERATION USING THE FTP COMMAND............304 Starting Diagnosis ........................................................134
ORGANIZATION ...........................................................3 Subprogram Search during Memory Operation .............21

<P> <T>
PREFACE ........................................................................7 Text Files and Binary Files ............................................14
Preparations for File Operation ....................................127 Total connection diagram...................................... 149,154
Preparations for File Operation and Editing.................117 TROUBLESHOOTING ...............................................195
TWISTED-PAIR CABLE SPECIFICATION..............159
<R>
RELATED MANUALS ...................................................4 <U>
RELATED NC PARAMETERS......................................9 UNSOLICITED MESSAGING FUNCTION ................32
Related NC Parameters ..................................................40
RELATED NC PARAMETERS........... 49,59,64,72,94,99 <W>
RJ-45 CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENTS ...............158 When DHCP is Used with the FOCAS2/Ethernet
Function......................................................................66
<S> When DHCP is Used with the FTP Server Function of
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .......................................... S-1 the Data Server ...........................................................65
Screen Layout ................................................................11 When DNS/DHCP is Used with the Data Server ...........64
SECURITY UNBLOCKING IN Windows XP (Service When machine remote diagnosis is forcibly terminated 77
Pack 2) / Vista ..........................................................322 When the start of machine remote diagnosis is accepted76
Selecting an Inquiry Destination ..................................134 When the start of machine remote diagnosis is rejected 76
Selection of Mode ..........................................................82 When Using a Macro Variable for Control (Simple
Separating Signal Lines................................................161 Method) ......................................................................91
Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B AND Power Motion i-A9,151,174 When Using a PMC Address for Control (Response
Series 30i/31i/32i-A ..............................................147,171 Notice method)...........................................................88
SETTING .....................................................................147 When Using a PMC Address for Control (Simple
Setting Method by CNC Screen .....................................83 Method) ......................................................................90
Setting Method by Personal Computer...........................87
SETTING OF DHCP .....................................................62

i-2
B-64014EN/06 REVISION RECORD

REVISION RECORD
Edition Date Contents
• Addition of warnings to "Safety Precautions"
06 Mar., 2014
• Correction of errors
• Addition of Power Motion i-A
• Addition of the ISO code input/output function to the Data Server functions and FTP file
05 Mar., 2013 transfer function
• Addition of file operation between the Data Server and USB memory
• Correction of errors
• Addition of Series 30i/31i/32i/35i-B
04 Nov., 2010 • Addition of unsolicited messaging function and ftp file transfer function
• Correction of errors
• Addition of such as NC program input/output on the Data Server functions
03 Aug., 2005
• Correction of errors
• Addition of the machine remote diagnosis function
02 Sep., 2004 • Addition of the Series 31i/310i-A, 32i/320i-A
• Correction of errors
01 Sep., 2003

r-1
 B-64014EN/06

* B - 6 4 0 1 4 E N / 0 6 *